Cat. No. V062-E1-02
NT31 and NT31C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT31and NT31C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
Revised January 2003
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!
!
!
WARNING
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xii
xii
xii
SECTION 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
4
16
17
20
22
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
26
29
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
35
36
37
39
47
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port . . . . . . .
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
54
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . .
85
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
100
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . .
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
134
135
140
150
155
157
168
168
188
191
221
227
230
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
235
241
245
Appendices
A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
255
259
265
267
269
271
273
275
277
283
F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
J
Relationship between System Program and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this Manual:
This manual describes connecting the NT-series NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals to a PC
(Programmable Controller) or other host and peripheral devices and the settings required for communica-
tions and applications. It includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the Programmable Terminal.
Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connec-
tion, communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the
PTs.
Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts
of PTs, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Func-
tions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also
explained here.
Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and
inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.
The Appendices provide specifications, dimensions, procedures for using an RS-232C/RS-422A Con-
vertor Unit, procedures for transporting and storing the PT, information on cable preparation, information
on the relationship between the system program and hardware, and product lists.
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Related Manuals:
Related manuals are listed below.
The j symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number.
Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal
S NT31 and NT31C PT Setup Manual (V062-E1-j, this manual)
This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and
peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications.
The functions and actual operating methods for the NT31 and NT31C PTs are
provided in the Reference Manual (V064-E1-j).
Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation
S NT31/31C/631/631C PT Reference Manual (V064-E1-j)
This manual is used for any of the following PTs: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C. It describes screen configurations, part functions, host control meth-
ods, and other application information.
PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT31 and NT31C PT
Setup Manual (V062-E1-j).
Creating and Transferring Screen Data, and Installing the System Program
S NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.1 Operation Manual (V061-E1-j)
The screens displayed on the NT31 and NT31C PTs are created with the Support
Tool and transferred to the PT. This manual describes how to create and transfer
screen data. It also describes how to download a system program to a PT using
the System Installer.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the
Support Tool.
Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON
S PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j)
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se-
ries: Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series. This manual describes the connection
and setup methods for these controllers.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows Version 4.1 is required to connect the
NT31 and NT31C PTs to these controllers.
S NT31/NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j)
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se-
ries: Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Sie-
mens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. This manual describes the connection and set-
up methods for these controllers.
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Ter-
minal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
Programmable Terminal.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
3
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure
to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult
with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to
the above-mentioned applications.
!
!
WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch
applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and cor-
rectly.
Safety Conventions
andtheir Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT31/31C.
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information
related to safety. The instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must
be observed.
WARNING
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!
!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
3
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any
internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT31/NT31C power before replacing the
backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF
the power supply.
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high
temperatures.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1
General
This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communica-
tion methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs.
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
9
11
16
16
17
17
17
18
18
20
20
20
21
21
22
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-1
1-1 Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
The NT31/NT31C is a sophisticated display unit (programmable terminal) which
automatically displays information and can also be used for operations when
necessary. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of
the NT31/NT31C for those using a programmable terminal (PT) for the first time.
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site
Production Line Status
Monitoring
The NT31/NT31C displays real-time information about the system and equip-
ment operating status, etc. Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and
other visuals, making the displays easy to understand.
Production Control (3)
Product
Today’s target
560
305
2
441
275
8
Current production
Number defective
Number repaired
7
15
% achieved
Directions to Workers on
the Shop Floor
The NT31/NT31C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the ap-
propriate remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
Positioning pin
is defective. Line stopped.
Check the following.
1. Defective pin L3
2. Position of dog M2
3. Mounting of photosensor P5
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NT31/NT31C allows workers to use the
NT31/NT31C as an operating panel; the results of the operations are trans-
mitted to the host.
Electroplating control
Corr. prv.
head
Electr. Wash.
Transport
head
head
Clamp
Unclamp
Adv.
Rev.
Corr.
prv.fluid
Electro-
lyte
Int. stop
Wash
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-1
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer us-
ing the Support Tool and stored in the NT31/NT31C. The screen data can be
displayed on the NT31/NT31C in response to instructions from the host or touch
switch operation.
Host
The screen data designated by
instructions from the host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a
Host
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and re-
ceive necessary data from the host.
Host link, NT link
Host
Sends Data to a Host
Data input using the touch panel (switch ON/OFF statuses, numeric values,
character strings) can be transmitted to the host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information, numeric
data, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C can be created on a per-
sonal computer using the Support Tool. Connect the NT31/NT31C to the per-
sonal computer with an RS-232C cable and transmit the screen data to the
NT31/NT31C.
Create screen data.
RS-232C
Personal
computer
(Support Tool)
Screen data
When the host is connected at serial port A,
the personal computer is only connected
when communicating screen data between
the NT31/NT31C and Support Tool.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
1-2 Functions of the NT31/NT31C
The NT31/NT31C has the following features.
1-2-1 Features
Downsized Body
• Slim body (50 mm or less in the panel*).
• The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not
protrude from the unit.
* When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness (page 32).
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
• The panel is an STN monochrome LCD type with backlight for the NT31 and an
STN color LCD type with backlight for the NT31C.
• The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site.
• Waterproofed equivalent to the NEMA4 standard and to IP65F*.
* The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long
periods.
320 dots
POWER
RUN
240 dots
Wide angle of visibility
Touch Switch Operation
Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations.
Compatibility with Other PTs
• There is upward compatibility between the NT31/NT31C and the following
models for screen data and user programs: NT11S, NT20S, NT30, NT30C,
NT600S, NT610G, NT610C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631. (Af-
ter being read to the Support Tool, screens must be modified in accordance
with the screen size. Depending on the function used, partial modification of
programs may also be necessary. For details on the compatibility of screen
data, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Ref-
erence Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual.
• The dimensions of the panel cut-out to accommodate the NT31/NT31C are the
same as for the NT30/NT30C.
Two Ports Featured as Standard:
Port A for Common Use by Support Tool/Host and Port B for Exclusive Use by the Host
• Communication with the host is possible via another port while connected to
the Support Tool.
• Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port
while communicating with the host.
Rapid System Program & Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit
• Installing a memory unit (type NT-MF261) on the rear of the NT31/NT31C
makes it easy to write screen data into the NT31/NT31C on site. This enables a
rapid response to setup changes.
• NT31/NT31C can store a system program into a memory unit. This enables the
system to handle more flexible setups.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
Screen Data Check
Function
Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT31/NT31C system
menu, without connecting up to the Support Tool.
Increased Screen Data
Capacity
The data capacity of 1 MB is twice that of the NT30/NT30C, enabling storage of a
larger quantity of screen data.
Large Increase in
Maximum Number of
Registered Elements
The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been consid-
erably increased, making it possible to create more expressive screens. For de-
tails, refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Binary Data can be Read
to/Written from the Host
It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the
NT31/NT31C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unneces-
sary, reducing the load on the host.
Character Display Using
High Definition Fonts
Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high-definition font.
Simple Version Upgrades
By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (Type NT-
ZJCAT1-EV4), the system program at the NT31/NT31C can be changed easily
from a personal computer.
Complies with
International Standards
The NT31/NT31C meets UL/CSA standards and EC directives.
Compatible with Other
Vendors’ Devices
Compatible with Sequencers in the following series: Mitsubishi A-series (Calcu-
lator Link) and FX-series (Programming Console), Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Se-
ries, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Se-
ries. Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT31/NT31C
to be controlled from other companies’ Sequencers.
Multiple Windows
Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen. A
9-word window control area has been allocated to the host; the contents of these
9 words can be changed from the Host to open, close, and move windows.
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C
Two NT31 models — the NT31, which is capable of versatile graphic displays,
and the NT31C, which is also capable of color display — are available. The dif-
ferences between the NT31 and NT31C are tabled below:
Function
Type
NT31
NT31C
NT31-ST121-EV2 (Beige)
NT31-ST121B-EV2 (Black)
NT31C-ST141-EV2 (Beige)
NT31C-ST141B-EV2 (Black)
Display panel STN monochrome LCD display
type (with white backlight)
STN color LCD type
(with white backlight)
Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT31/NT31C types.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions
The V2 versions of NT31/NT31C are supplemented and enhanced by the fol-
lowing functions.
High-speed 1:N NT Link
The V2 versions are compatible with the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as the
earlier standard 1:N NT Link.
Additional Mathematical
Functions
Operands (values referenced by formula) can be registered to allow the PT to
perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations to
numeral memory tables or words in the host.
Device Monitor Function
Interlock Function
The new device monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating
mode or display/change values in the PC’s memory areas. The present values
(PVs) of several words can be listed with the device monitor.
PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PC if interlock bits have been
allocated in the PC for the corresponding PT touch switches, numeric inputs, or
string inputs.
Improved Lamp/Touch
Switch Labels
The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels:
• Display several lines of labels.
• Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON.
• Display the numeral memory table contents as labels.
• Display the string memory table contents as labels.
NT30/NT30C and
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
Emulation
The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area
can be set to emulate those of the NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C;
this mode is called NT30/620 compatible mode.
When the PT is operating in NT30/620 compatible mode, it will be equivalent to
an NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C in the functions listed below. The
PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below.
Refer toAppendix C in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Termi-
nal Reference Manual for more details.
• Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status
notify area
• Image/library codes
• Insertion of image/library data into character strings
Additional CS1 Data
Areas Accessible
Data areas in CS1 PCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed. The
data areas listed below can be accessed (read/written).
All banks in the EM area, timer completion flags (TU), counter completion
flags (CU), Work areas (WR), Task flags (TK), and the HR area.
Recipe Function
You can set the data (numeric values) for multiple words in record units using the
tabular elements on the PT screen, and write these settings in a single operation
to words on the host (i.e., PC or PT memory) using a touch switch operation on
the PT Unit. Also, multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in
one operation. In this way, groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT
Unit, and written to or read from the host.
Adjusting Contrast and
Brightness During PT
Operation
You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the
touch switch or commands from the host, even while the PT is in operation.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C
Item
Support Tool used
NT30/NT30C
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 or NT-ZA3AT-EV2
On rear of unit
NT31/NT31C
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
DIP switches
None (software settings)
Not possible
Use of B7A unit
Use of memory unit
RS-232C interface
Possible
Not possible
Possible
Connector (9-pin) also used as port for - Serial port A connector (also used
screen data transfer.
for screen data transfer, 9-pin)
- Serial port B connector (for host
communications only, 25-pin)
RS-422A/485 interface
Terminal block
Serial port B (25-pin D-SUB connector)
Replacement backlight
NT30-CFL01/NT30C-CFL01
NT31C-CFL01 (common use)
NT31/NT31C system program data
NT-ZS3AT-EV1
(including system installer)
The system installer and system pro-
gram data are supplied with the Sup-
port Tool.
1
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Not possible
Possible*
Memory Link
System program Exclusive use by Memory Link
Same as OMRON connection
Exclusive use by Memory Link
By touch panel operation
By touch panel operation
Maximum of 3999
Screen data
Shared with OMRON connection
By a control on the rear of the unit
Not possible
LCD contrast adjustment
Backlight brightness adjustment
Number of user-registered screens
Maximum of 2000
Screen data capacity*2
(User program memory)
Numeral string data
512 KB
1 MB
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 1000
256
Maximum of 2000
Maximum of 2000
Maximum of 1000
Character string data
Bit data
Mathematical tables
None
256 max.
Calculations can be executed
automatically in the PT.
*1
*3
Image data
Library data
Maximum of 224
Maximum of 4095
*3
Maximum of 896
Maximum of 12288
Method for storing numeric values
(numeral memory data and PT status
control area)
Fixed as BCD (binary coded decimal)
Selectable from BCD (binary coded
decimal) or binary
3
PT status control area size
PT status notify area size
Window control area size
Registering continuous screen
4 words
3 words
None
5 words (partial change of contents)*
3
2 words (partial change of contents)*
9 CH*2
Possible
Not possible (Use a screen switchover
as a substitute.)
*1
Lamp/Touch switch labels
Fixed display (1 line only)
- Multiple lines can be displayed
*1
- ON/OFF switching is possible
*1
- Numeral display is possible
*1
- Character string display is possible
Interlock function
None
Operations can be disabled from the
PC by allocating interlock bits to the
corresponding touch switch, numeral
*1
input, or character string input.
*1
Device monitor function
Not possible
Possible
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
Item
Recipe function
NT30/NT30C
NT31/NT31C
None
---
Possible
Accessible CS1 PC data areas
The data areas listed below can be
accessed in addition to the data areas
accessible with the NT30/NT30C.
*5
- EM banks (EM_0 to EM_C)
- Timer completion flags (TU)
- Counter completion flags (CU)
- Work areas (WR)
- Task flags (TK)
- HR area
*1: These functions are available only in V2 versions of the NT31/NT31C.
*2: This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.
*3: The values are the same as the NT30/NT30C when the PT is in NT30/620 compatible mode.
*4: The window control area can be used only in the Vj versions of the NT31/NT31C.
For differences in programming, refer to Appendix B in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Refer-
ence Manual.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section 1-2
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C
The following are the principal functions of the NT31/NT31C.
Functions relating to data display
Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse
video. High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged.
Graphic display
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, circular arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed. They can
also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.
Memory data display
The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed. The
contents of memory tables can be changed from the host.
Graph display
Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs, trend graphs, and analogue meter graphs can be
displayed using numeral memory tables
Lamp display
Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to display different
graphics in the ON and OFF states.
Alarm list/history display
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit. The time
and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed.
Functions relating to data output
Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be sounded.
Screen printing
A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer
connected to the NT31/NT31C.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
Functions relating to data input
Input by touch switches
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.
The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display.
Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated.
Pop-up window function
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch.
In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set inside the
window. A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously. Since the window need only be opened when input is required,
the screen can be used efficiently.
Numeral/character string setting function
Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at the
operation site.
The input data is written to numeral/character string memory tables and also sent to the host. It is also possible to disable input by control
from the host.
Recipe function
Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host in one operation.
Input from a bar code reader
Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field.
Functions relating to communication
Communications with the host
The NT31/NT31C can communicate with the host by four methods: host link, 1:1 NT Link, 1:N NT link (standard or high-speed), and
Memory link. Data can be read from the host, and data input by means of touch switches and numeral/character string settings can be
sent to the host. It is also possible to connect with other model PCs.
Functions relating to the system
System menu
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.
Creation of screen data
Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built-in screen data memory.
Resume function
The status and memory table contents of the NT31/NT31C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while operation is
stopped, or while the power is off, and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted.
Screen saver function
This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen.
Clock function
The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data.
Programming Console function
The PT can perform the same operations as a C200H-PR027-E Programming Console when the PT is connected to a CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, or SRM1 PC in a 1:1 NT Link connection, or a CS1G/CS1H PC in a 1:N NT Link con-
nection.
Device Monitor function
When the PT is connected to a PC in a 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link, the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PC’s operat-
ing mode, displaying or changing the PVs of words, or reading the error log.
System program install function
The system program of the NT31/NT31C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (NT-
ZJ3AT1/ZJCAT-EV2). It can also be installed by using a memory unit (NT-MF261).
Screen display history function/alarm history function
The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are displayed.
The alarm history function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times they are turned ON.
Trend graph logging function and background function
Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the record can be
maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed (background function).
Mathematical function
This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table has been set in screen data.
Arithmetic operations, bit operations, logic operations, and comparison operations can be performed. Operations with up to 5 terms are
possible.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
1-2-6 Displays
The NT31/NT31C can display various kinds of elements such as characters, nu-
meric values, graphs, lamps, and touch switches, on a screen. The screen data
displayed by the NT31/NT31C are created by using the Support Tool at a per-
sonal computer.
Characters
(fixed display)
Restart
Stop
Touch switches
Characters
Line 1 Status
Machine name: NT31C-ST141
Production qty.: 137 units
(character string display)
Numeric values
(numeral display)
Bar graph
25%
0%
50%
100%
Lamps
Check 1
Check 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Fixed Displays
Characters and various graphics (circles, circular arcs, sectors, polylines, poly-
gons and rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and mark
data, image data, and library data that has already been registered, can be writ-
ten directly onto the screen.
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
* A continuous straight line with
up to 256 points can be drawn.
* A polygon with up to 255
vertices can be drawn.
Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters.
They can be used as custom characters within character strings.
Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are regis-
tered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on
the screen.
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.
There is a two-color mode, in which the display color and background color of the
image are specified when it is registered in a screen, and an eight-color mode in
which colors are assigned to the image in advance.
Since image data is composed of dots, it requires a large data size but offers
great powers of expression.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be dis-
played at any position on the screen.
Since it is generated by combining graphics, library data has a small data size.
Mark Image data Library data
Lamps
These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states
of bits at the host. Squares, circles, sectors and polygons can be used for lamps
(normal (standard) lamps). In accordance with the status of the host bit, they can
be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation between nor-
mal and reverse video display states).
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states of
the host bit (such lamps are called image/library lamps).
There are four standard lamp labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Normal (Standard) Lamps
ON
ON
Host
Unlit state
Lit state
Image Library Lamps
ON
Host
Unlit state
Lit state
Touch Switches
These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch switch
on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects:
• Notification to a host bit (input notification function)
• Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)
• Input of a numeric value or character string (input key function)
• Copying of a numeric value or character string (copy key function)
• Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field (cursor moving
key function)
• Obtaining a hard copy of the screen (screen print function)
• Opening / Closing a window
• Moving a window
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a
host bit in the same way as lamps.
The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches: Stan-
dard, shadow, 3-dimension, no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area
within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the touch switch area) can
be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set.
When this
Shown
position is
Touch
switch area
in
pressed...
reverse
video
Display
frame
Function executed
There are four touch-switch labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Numeral Displays
Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed. The dis-
played numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral
memory tables.
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integral part and
fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance.
String Displays
Numeral Inputs
Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed.
The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in
the character string memory tables.
Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input nu-
meric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the
host.
Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
12345678
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
"
Input
0 .
Window
String Inputs
Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches, bar code read-
ers, etc. The input character strings can also be stored in a character string
memory table and notified to the host.
String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
Character string setting input field
Display
NT31C
Input
NT31C NT31
NT631C
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
Thumbwheel Switches
Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with
the corresponding touch switch (+, –). The input numeric values can also be
stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host.
Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an
interlock bit has been allocated.
Graphs
These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric val-
ues stored in numeral memory tables. There are the following four types.
Bar Graphs
Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a
percentage within the range –100% to +100% of a preset value.
60%
Analog Meters
Analogue meters display, using a quarter, half, or full circle shape, the present
value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range
–100% to +100% of the preset value. Users can choose from moving pointer
type and filling area type displays. Users can also add graduation to the graph.
60%
Broken Line Graphs
Broken line graphs display, in an easy-to-read form, a sequence of numeral
memory table values converted to a percentage within the range –100% to
+100% of a preset value.
100%
0%
Example showing a series of 11
numeral memory table values
(with a check mark set for the
display sign)
–100%
Trend Graphs
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory
table, converting the value to a percentage within the range –100% to +100% of
a preset value. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.
Past data can also be recorded, and the numeral memory table can be read
(sampled) even while the trend graph is not being displayed.
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data, by
pressing touch switches.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section
Alarm List/History
The alarm list/history function displays messages in list form, or graphics
(image/library data), in accordance with changes in bit memory table statuses.
For the alarm list, a series of bit memory tables are monitored, and messages
(contents of character string memory tables) set for bit memory tables that come
ON are displayed.
For the alarm history, bit memory tables for which the history property is set are
continually monitored, and the time when they come ON and number of times
they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message (charac-
ter string) set for the bit memory table.
The NT31/NT31C allows selection of the display order as the newest record first
or the oldest record first by memory switch setting.
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms
occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred.
Alarm List
Message (character string table No. 32)
set for bit memory table No. 14
No.13
Character string table No. 50
Image/library data 1002
Bit
HOST
1(ON)
Character string table No. 32
A000000
L001003
D010015
0
1
0
No.14
No.15
Character string table No. 32
Image/library data 113C
Character string table No. 54
Image/library data 1125
Image/library
data 113C
When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.
Alarm History
Message (character string table No. 13)
set for bit memory table No. 24
Recorded data
Character string table No. 11
Image/library data 005F
Bit memory table No. 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
No. 22
Character string table No. 13
Character string table No. 12
No. 23
Bit memory table No. 23
97/12/04 11:25:12
Character string table No. 12
Image/library data 102A
Image/library
data 102B
Character string table No. 13
Image/library data 102B
No. 24
When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.
Recipe
You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format, and write it
to the host. You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and
display it on the PT screen.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Configuration
Section 1-3
1-3 System Configuration
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT31/NT31C. For
details on product models, refer to Appendix J Model List (page 277).
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT31/NT31C.
Host
Controls the NT31/NT31C as required while controlling machines and
monitoring the production line.
Host Link: C series, CVM1/CV series PC, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units, host link units, and SRM1. However,
connection is not possible to some models of CPU unit and SRM1 (pages 54
and 101).
Bar code reader
Bar codes can be read
as character strings.
NT Link: CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CQM1, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE),
CVM1/CV series PCs, SRM1
RS-232C cable
(max. 15 m)
or
Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1. However, connection is notpossible
to some models (pages 67, 72, 111 and 113).
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Memory Link: Can be connected to a personal computer, FA computer, etc.
Other companies’ PCs can also be connected.
Personal computer
Printer
For printing out the
currently displayed
NT31/NT31C screen.
Running Windows 95/98/NT
Support Tool
Used to create screens for the
NT31/NT31C at the personal
computer and transmit them to the
NT31/NT31C, and to make
NT31/NT31C settings.
System installer
Used to change the system
program of the NT31/NT31C.
Memory unit
Can store screen data
and system program to
be read out
NT31/NT31C
Displays production line monitoring and
instructions to the operation site, and
notifies the switch ON/OFF status and
numeric value inputs to the host.
automatically at startup.
When a 1:N NT Link is being used, up to
8 PTs can be connected to a single PC.
• Bar code reader (page 37)
• Recommended printers (page 36)
It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (us-
ing the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol), and printers that comply with
one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or
ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome).
• Memory unit (pages 39 and 47)
NT-MF261 (made by OMRON)
• Support Tool (page 35)
NT-series Support Tool Version 4.0 for Windows (Made by OMRON)
• NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 (CD-ROM version)
• System installer (page 35)
System installer (made by OMRON)
The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support
Tool (NTZJCAT1-EV4).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications with the Host
Section 1-4
Reference: The following optional devices are available. All of them can be used either with
NT31 or NT31C.
Replacement backlight
NT31C-CFL01
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet NT30-KBA04
Chemical-resistant cover
Replacement battery
NT30-KBA01
3G2A9-BAT08
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host
The NT31/NT31C has the following two communication ports.
• Serial port A:
D-SUB 9-pin connector
For RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code readers can be con-
nected here.)
• Serial port B:
D-SUB 25-pin connector
For RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (Selectable by memory switch)
(The Support Tool and bar code readers cannot be connected here.)
The host can be connected at either of these two ports.
The connection methods for each communication method at the PT and host
sides are indicated below. Make the settings in accordance with the communica-
tion method that can be used with the PC to be connected and the conditions at
the operation site.
Reference: When using an RS-232C/422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) with the host link or NT
link (1:1) communication method, RS-485 cannot be used. The connection must
be made with RS-232C or RS-422A.
1-4 Communications with the Host
The NT31/NT31C is connected to the host by one of the following communica-
tion methods.
The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PC:
• Host link
• 1:1 NT Link
• 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The following communications can be used to connect another companies’ PC
or FA computer:
• Communications protocol supported by the other company’s PC
• Memory link
In all of these communication methods that can be used with NT31/NT31C, data
communication with host is by direct connection (Memory link is, however, a
quasi-direct connection).
In the following, the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will
be discussed. Memory links will be explained in 1-5 Communications Using
Memory Links.
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function
With the NT31/NT31C, the bits and words referring to data required for display,
and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PC memory
area.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications with the Host
Section 1-4
The NT31/NT31C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and
words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen, control the
PT operating status, and notify statuses to the host.
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits with-
out using a PC program is called the direct connection function.
The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words
and allocated bits.
The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the
NT31/NT31C to be read from the memory area in the PC and written to memory
tables in the NT31/NT31C. Also, the data input at the NT31/NT31C can be writ-
ten to the memory area in the PC. The NT31/NT31C screen can be changed in
accordance with statuses in the PC memory area, and the NT31/NT31C’s status
data can be written to the PC’s memory area.
NT31/NT31C
PC
DM area
I/O relay area
Auxiliary relay area Timers/counters
Features of the Direct
Connection Function
The direct connection function has the following features.
• The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction informa-
tion and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area
of the PC memory.
• Since the NT31/NT31C can directly refer to PC bit and word data without using
the program at the PC, it can be connected to the PC without changing the PC
program which controls the currently running production line.
• The area to control and notify the NT31/NT31C statuses, including display
screens, display/no display status, and buzzer output, can be freely allocated
to any part of the PC data area. This means that the PC status can be read and
controlled just by reading this area at the PC side, without preparing a special
communication program.
The direct connection function allows the NT31/NT31C to directly read and write
almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the
NT31/NT31C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PC so that
its program development efficiency is improved.
1-4-2 Host Link
1-4-3 NT Link
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of the
host are read and displayed by host link communication. This method can be
used for connection to the majority of PC types.
NT link is a method for high-speed communication with a PC using the direct
connection function. The PCs that can be connected with the NT link are as fol-
lows.
• When using the built-in host link function of a CPU unit or SRM1:
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CVM1/CV-series PC (-EV1 or later version), SRM1
Besides the 1:1 NT Link method, in which one PC is connected to one PT, the
NT31/NT31C can also use the 1:N connection NT Link method, which allows a
maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PC port.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications with the Host
Section 1-4
PCs that can be connected with the 1:N connection NT Link method are as fol-
lows: CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1).
The NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link that pro-
vides faster 1:N communications. The only PCs that support the high-speed 1:N
NT Link are the -EV1 and higher versions of the CS1G/CS1H PCs.
In the following sections, the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link commu-
nication method in general, the term 1:1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to
NT Links with a 1:1 connection, and the term 1:N NT Link is used to refer to both
standard and high speed NT Links with 1:N connections. When necessary, the
standard 1:N NT Link is distinguished from the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
Features of the NT Link
The NT link has the following features.
• High-speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed. The
NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link.
• Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible.
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allo-
cated to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits of
words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other pur-
poses.
• The NT link can be used even when the PC is in the RUN mode. (When the host
link method is used, the NT31/NT31C switches to the monitor mode when the
PC is in the RUN mode.)
• In the case of PTs that support the standard 1:N NT Link (NT20S, NT31,
NT31C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C) up to 8 PTs
can be connected to one port of the PC and used at the same time. Up to 8 PTs
(NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C) can also be connected simultaneously
when the high-speed 1:N NT Link is being used.
All of the PTs connected to a PC port must use either the standard or high-
speed 1:N NT Link; the two communications systems cannot share a single
port.
• When using a C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PC and standard 1:N NT Links, up to
three 1:N NT Link systems (i.e., 24 PTs) can be connected by installing a com-
munication board in the option slot of the CPU. (Only the standard 1:N NT Link
can be used.) For details on the Communications Board, refer to the SYSMAC
Communications Board Operation Manual (W304-E1-j).
• When using a CQM1H PC and standard 1:N NT Links, multiple 1:N NT Link
systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the
Inner Board slots. For details on the Serial Communications Board, refer to the
CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual (W365-E1-j).
• When using CS1G or CS1H PC, multiple 1:N NT Link systems (standard or
high-speed) can be connected by installing a Serial Communications Board in
the INNER Board slot or installing a Serial Communications Unit in the Back-
plane. For details on the communication board/communication unit, refer to
the CS1-series Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual
(W336-E1-j).
• If the PC used supports the Programming Console function, the NT31/NT31C
can be used as a Programming Console.
• If the PC being used supports the Device Monitor function, the NT31/NT31C
can be used to change the PC’s operating mode and read/change data in the
PC’s memory areas.
The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT31/NT31C screen data and
PC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used with
the NT link method as they are.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Using Memory Links
Section 1-5
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PCs
Installing a system program for multi-venders by using a specific system installer
enables the NT31/NT31C to be connected to the PCs of other models in direct
connection. This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool (NT-
ZJCAT1-EV4).
Compatible PC
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the following model PCs.
• Mitsubishi A series programmable controller (computer link module)
• Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller
• SLC 500 Series by Allen-Bradley
• 90-20 and 90-30 Series by GE Fanuc
• S7-300 and S7-400 Series by Siemens
For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PCs, refer to the PC
Connection Manual or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual.
1-5 Communications Using Memory Links
In this section, a communication method other than the direct connection, called
the memory link, is discussed.
1-5-1 Memory Link
Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer
or a FA computer and the NT31/NT31C by using RS-232C/422A communica-
tion.
In memory link, there is an area called PT Memory, as shown below, inside the
NT31/NT31C, and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PC. This allows PT
memory and the display elements of the NT31/NT31C to make a quasi-direct
connection. By sending a command for the memory link, the host can make the
NT31/NT31C execute processes through PT memory. Frequently used com-
mands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table,
character-string memory table, and bit memory table.
NT31/NT31C
PT
PC
PT memory
Numeral
memory
table
Lamp
Direct connection
RS-232C/422A
communication
In the memory link method, the only difference is that the NT31/NT31C finds its
communication target inside instead of outside. In the memory link method,
therefore, change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the
exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection. (With the
NT31/NT31C, the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen data
for the memory link.)
When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods, the
memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions,
as described below.
• The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used.
• The following strobes of PT status notify bits does not turn on (page 7 to 27).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Using Memory Links
Section 1-5
Screen switching strobe
Numerals input strobe
Character-string input strobe
• The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only.
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link
The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are as
follows:
• In the memory link method, the communication with the host should be carried
out by using commands. Compared to the ordinal direct connection, which can
be used requiring almost no programs, the memory link method requires a pro-
gram that is necessary for interchange of commands. This, however, gives ad-
vantages to the memory link method by using a large variety of functions avail-
able in the direct connections from major models such as a personal computer
and a FA computer equipped with RS-232C/RS-422A communication means,
allowing the PT to be suited for larger usage.
• Actual PCs have many kinds of areas, where as PT memory is a single area
with only one kind. When creating screen data by using the memory link meth-
ods, it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory.
For communication between the host and the PT by the memory link method and
for handling screen display elements, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function
When memory link communications are being used, the NT31/NT31C can be
switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT31/NT31C is operating
and screen data can be written. (The NT31/NT31C can be returned to RUN
mode after the screen data is written.)
The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a
fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for
maintenance.
For more details on the memory link online transfer function, refer to information
on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating
Section 1-6
1-6 Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT31/NT31C.
Host
Support Tool
NT31/NT31C
Set the host settings.
Install the Support
Tool at the computer.
Install the PT in the
operation panel.
• For the host link, refer to
pages 54 and 101, and
the manuals for the host
link unit and peripheral
tools.
(refer to the manual for
the Support Tool)
(page 32)
Connect the power supply.
(page 33)
• For the NT link (1:1), refer
to pages 67 and 111.
*1
Install the system program.
(refer to page 151 and the
Support Tool manual)
• For the NT link (1:N), re-
fer to pages 72 and 113.
• For the high-speed NT
link (1:N), refer to pages
75 and 115.
Create the screens.
Make the settings in the
system installer mode.
*2
(Refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual
and the Support Tool Operation Manual.)
(page 151)
• For the Memory link, refer
to pages 72 and 116
(page 155)
Transmit the screen data.
Set the memory switches.
(page 157)
Connect to the host.
Connect to the
NT31/NT31C.
When RS-232C used at the PT: refer to section 4
When RS-422A/485 used at the PT: refer to section 5
Confirm the settings and
check communication.
Create the host program.
Start operation.
*1: System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for example
when changing the system program, or to recover the original status of the
installed program. This operation is not normally necessary. When using other PC
models (sequencers), however, it is necessary to install specific system programs.
*2: Display of the system menu, and all change operations, can be inhibited. This
enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and
settings.
Reference: S For the system program, use the NT31/NT31C system program supplied as
an accessory with the NT-series Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
S For the Support Tool, use NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1).
Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software.
Device or Software
Manual Title
Manual
Number
NT31/NT31C,
Reference Manual
V064-E1-1
NT631/NT631C
System Installer
Support Tool
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
V061-E1-j
V061-E1-j
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating
Section 1-6
Device or Software
Manual Title
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual
Manual
Number
PC
W262-E1-j
W317-E1-j
W352-E1-j
W356-E1-j
W130-E1-j
W217-E1-j
W236-E1-j
W235-E1-j
W302-E1-j
W303-E1-j
W322-E1-j
W140-E1-j
W228-E1-j
W363-E1-j
W202-E1-j
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (programming)
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (programming)
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (programming)
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE (-Z) Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Programming Manual
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual (programming)
SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Dia-
grams
CS1-series CS1G/H-CPU jj-E Programmable Controllers Operation
W339-E1-j
Manual
CS1-series Serial Communication Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365-E1-j
CompoBus Master Control SRM1 Operation Manual
Unit
W318-E1-j
Programming Devices
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PCs
W248-E1-j
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PCs
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide
W249-E1-j
W332-E1-j
W333-E1-j
CX-Programmer User Manual
-
Host Link Unit/
Serial Communications
Board
SYSMAC C-series Host Link Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series Host Link Operation Manual
W143-E1-j
W205-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HW-COM06-EV1 W304-E1-j
Serial Communications Board Operation Manual
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts of PTs, as the
required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
29
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method for Connection to the Host
Section 2-1
2-1 Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT31/NT31C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communication method.
NT31/NT31C Communication Ports and Communication Methods
The NT31/NT31C has two communication ports. Their uses are indicated in the
table below.
Communication
Usable Communication Methods
Communication Type
Port
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
*
Serial port A
RS-232C
Memory link
(Support Tool connection)
(bar code reader input function)
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
Memory link
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
(select between RS-232C
and RS-422A/485)
Serial port B
*
* There are two NT Link (1:N) communications rates: standard and high-speed.
Communication Methods That Can Be Used with the Host
The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be
connected to the NT31/NT31C.
• RS-232C
• RS-422A
• RS-485
The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the
host unit. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Converting the Communication Type with an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor
Unit
The following communication type conversions are possible by using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E, made by OMRON).
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-485
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method for Connection to the Host
Section 2-1
Combinations of Communication Method and Connection Method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication
method used and the communication type for communication between the
NT31/NT31C and the host are indicated in the table below.
Usable Communication
Method
Communica-
tion Type at
PT
Communica-
tion Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Details
NT
NT
Link
Host
link
Memory
link
Link
(1:1) (1:N)
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
Host
RS-232C
RS-232C
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
79
RS-232C (max. 15 m)
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
88
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
RS-422A
(max. 500 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
PT
RS-232C
Host
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-422A
RS-232C
f
f
f
f
f
f
92
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)
RS-422A
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
117
122
RS-422A (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
PT
Host
RS-422A
RS-422A (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible : Connection not possible
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method for Connection to the Host
Section 2-1
Usable Communication
Method
Communica-
tion Type at
PT
Communica-
tion Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Details
NT
Link
NT
Link
Host
link
Memory
link
(1:1) (1:N)
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
Host
f
88
RS-485
(max. 500 m)
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Host
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
f
f
f
92
RS-485
RS232C
(total length 500 m)
(max. 2 m)
RS-485
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
121
125
RS-485 (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
PT
Host
RS-485
RS-485 (total length 500 m)
f: Connection possible : Connection not possible
• The RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at
pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector
at the host.
• +5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT31/NT31C. When connecting an
NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required for the NT-
AL001.
• The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply
from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is OFF).
• NT link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the
NT31/NT31C side for communication with the host, but in this case one NT-
AL001 unit is required for each NT31/NT31C. In this case, it is convenient to
use serial port A of the NT31/NT31C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Names and Functions of Parts
Section 2-2
2-2 Names and Functions of Parts
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the
NT31/NT31C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware set-
tings is also described.
Front View
POWER LED
Lit in green when the power is supplied.
POWER
RUN
RUN LED
Display
The NT31 has a monochrome LCD
screen with a backlight, and the NT31C
has an STN color LCD screen with a
backlight.
The whole area of the screen is a touch
panel which works as an input device.
• Lit in green while the unit
is in the RUN mode.
• Lit in orange or red when
the battery is low (orange
in the RUN mode, red in
other modes).
Reference: The NT31/NT31C comes in two body colors.
NT31
NT31C
Body Color
Beige
NT31-ST121-EV2
NT31-ST121B-EV2
NT31C-ST141-EV2
NT31C-ST141B-EV2
Black
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Names and Functions of Parts
Section 2-2
Rear View
Battery cover
The battery is secured underneath this cover.
Reset switch (inside the cover)
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT31/NT31C.
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.
Expansion interface connector
(under the label)
When using an expansion
interface unit such as a memory
unit, peel off the label and
connect it here.
GR terminal
Grounding terminal to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
24V
DC
PRINTER
PORT
B
PORT
A
Power input terminals
Connect the power to the
NT31/NT31C at these
terminals.
Warning label
Backlight unit (inside the cover)
Open the cover to reveal the backlight.
The backlight is off while the cover is
removed. Tighten the cover screw
securely.
Serial port A connector
Connect the cable for connection to the
host or Support Tool here. A bar code
reader can also be connected here. This is
a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
Serial port B connector
Connect the cable for connection to the host here. Depending on the
setting made at the NT31/NT31C system menu, either RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 may be used. This is a 25-pin connector.
It is not possible to use RS-232C and RS-422A/485 at the same time.
Printer connector
Connect the printer cable here. Output
conforms to Centronics specifications.
Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
For details on connecting to the host, refer Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
3-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
34
35
36
36
37
37
37
38
39
40
40
47
48
48
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Section 3-1
Note On unpacking the NT31/NT31C and peripheral devices, check their external ap-
pearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no ab-
normal noise on shaking the unit lightly.
3-1 Installation
Install the NT31/NT31C in the operation panel and connect the power to the
NT31/NT31C as described below.
3-1-1 Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Note 1. Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions.
• Severe temperature variations
• Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
• High humidity, condensation
• Splashing chemical agents
• Severe oil splashing
• Corrosive or flammable gases
• Strong vibrations or shocks
• Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
• Strong ultra-violet irradiation
2. Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
• Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
• Strong electromagnetic fields
• Nearby power cables
• Potential exposure to radioactivity
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel
The NT31/NT31C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel.
Use the panel fittings and tool (Philips screwdriver) included in the product pack-
age and follow the procedure below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the
NT31/NT31C from the front side of the panel.
131 + 0.5 mm
0
mm
+ 0.5 mm
184
0
mm
2. Attach the panel fittings at the four positions at top and bottom and two posi-
tions at right and left, shown below, from the rear of the NT31/NT31C.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw
with the Philips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
24V
DC
PRINTER
PORT
B
PORT
A
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Section 3-1
Note 1. During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the
unit.
2. The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 N⋅m in order to ensure
water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT31/NT31C may be warped if
the tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not be soiled or
warped, and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure
and strong.
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note 1. Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may
stop. Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.
2. Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
3. Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.
4. Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
5. Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
6. If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply
with reinforced insulation (compliance with EC directives is planned for June
1998).
24 VDC
Breaker
24 VDC
power supply
Power Supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage fluctuation range 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC
(24 VDC –15%, +10%)
Power supply voltage capacity
15 W or more
Parts Used for Connection
2
Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Fork type
Round type
7 mm or less
7 mm or less
Recommended Terminals
Maker
Type
Type
Applicable Wire
(fork type) (round type) (stranded wire)
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
Fuji Terminal
2-YS3A
2-YAS3.5
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
2
2.0 to 2.63 mm
V2-S3.5
2-3.5
Nichifu Terminal
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Section 3-1
3-1-4 Grounding
The NT31/NT31C has a functional ground terminal ( ).
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.
1, 2, 3...
1. In cases where the distance between the NT31/NT31C is small and it is as-
sumed that there is no potential difference between grounds, ground as
shown in Fig. (a) below.
2. In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NT31/NT31C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. (b). If there is some dis-
tance between the NT31/NT31C and host and grounding at a single point is
difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of the
NT31/NT31C.
3. If the NT31/NT31C is installed in the same panel as equipment that gener-
ates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional ground
terminal ( ) of the NT31/NT31C.
NT31/
NT31C
NT31/
NT31C
Host
Host
Grounding at
a single point
Fig. (b)
Ground to
100 Ω max.
Fig. (a)
Note Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Support Tool
Section 3-2
3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT31/NT31C, or to transmit screen
data created with the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, the NT31/NT31C must
be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.
The NT31/NT31C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at se-
rial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with the
host can be maintained as it is while the NT31/NT31C is connected to the
RS-232C cable from a personal computer.
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so that
the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.
PRINTER
PORT
B
PORT
A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Communication Conditions
The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer
and Support Tool are started.
Recommended Connector Cable
Use the cable indicated below.
• CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix F Making the Cable
for Connecting a PC (page 269).
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Printer
Section 3-3
3-3 Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to the NT31/NT31C enables printing of hard copies of the
currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system menu op-
erations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected
to the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to the pages cited.
• Hard copies of the screen (Refer to information on printing data and checking
the printer status in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Termi-
nal Reference Manual.)
• Screen display history record data (page 198)
• Alarm history record data (page 200)
3-3-1 Connection Method
Connect the printer to the NT31/NT31C with a Centronics cable, as shown be-
low. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.
Reference: If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer
is on, the NT31/NT31C may malfunction. Always turn off the power to the printer
before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
24V
DCPRINTER
PORT
B
PORT
A
Recommended Connector Cable
The following connection cables are recommended.
• NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON
Recommended Printers
When using a printer, use one that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using
the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol) or complies with one of the follow-
ing EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24-J82
(monochrome).
When using a monochrome printer with an NT31C, set Tone printing with the
NT31C memory switches (page 174).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Section 3-4
3-4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT31/NT31C enables bar code data to read
as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character string
memory tables.
In order to use a bar code reader, the Comm. A Method memory switch must be
set to Bar-Code Reader.
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader,
refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the NT31/NT31C/
NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Note Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to
the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
3-4-1 Connection Method
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT31/NT31C, as shown in the
figure below.
NT31/NT31C
Bar code reader
PRINTER
PORT
B
PORT
A
Serial port A
9-pin connector
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Connector cable
Bar code reader cable
Bar code reader must match the communication setting (3-4-2 Setting a Bar
Code Reader, page 37) and data format (3-4-3 Data Format, page 38) in order to
connect to the NT31/NT31C. Please confirm the specification of the bar code
reader before using.
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Making the Cable
for Connection to a Bar Code Reader (page 271).
Reference: The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it cannot
be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that when a bar
code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communication conditions and other
settings for it by selection from the system menu.
Settings at the
NT31/NT31C
At the NT31/NT31C, set the communication conditions for communication with
the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from the options
indicated in the table below.
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 188).
Item
Possible Settings
7 or 8 bits
Default Setting
Data bits
7 bits
2 bits
Even
Stop bit(s)
Parity
1 or 2 bits
None, odd, even
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Input Method Manual, Auto
9600 bps
Manual
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Section 3-4
Settings at the Bar Code
Reader
Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure
that the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match the
communication settings made at the NT31/NT31C. For details on the setting
method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
Item
Communications speed
Possible Settings
4800, 9600, 19200 bps
EVEN, ODD, NONE
1 or 2 bits
Parity
Stop bits
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
Preamble
STX
Postamble
ETX
RS/CS control
Communication protocol
Available
No-protocol mode
Transmission of number of bar code label digits Transmission prohibited
Transmission of ID characters
Bar code types
Transmission prohibited
Multi-reading (all types can be
read)
Trigger switch setting
Automatic reading mode
About RS/CS Control
During bar code reading, the NT31/NT31C performs RS/CS control. When the
Input Method setting of the NT31/NT31C is set to Auto, the RS signal is turned
OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been notified to the host.
Because of this, when the Auto setting is made, the next input is not possible
until the data has been notified to the host.
However, when the setting is Auto and the RS/CS signals of the cable are
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar
code reader to the NT31/NT31C is updated regardless of whether or not the data
is notified to the host.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
3-4-3 Data Format
The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the
NT31/NT31C is shown below.
STX
Data
Data
Data
ETX
(02H)
(03H)
The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to
7FH, and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and
discarded.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with a V1 or V2 version of an
NT31/NT31C PT (NT31-ST121j-EVj or NT31C-ST141j-EVj).
Reference: Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed, the func-
tion and using method of memory unit varies as follows.
PT Model
System Program
Function of Memory Unit
Conventional memory unit function. (Refer to
56.)
(System programs can not be transmitted us-
ing memory unit.)
Earlier than Ver. 2
Without Vj
suffix
Ver. 2 or later
New memory unit function.
(System programs can be transmitted using
memory unit.)
Earlier than Ver. 2
Ver. 2 or later
With Vj suf-
fix
The memory unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used, re-
gardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT.
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that system program and screen
data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Sup-
port Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be
changed simply by installing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
In addition, even if NT31/NT31C is replaced, the previous status can be main-
tained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and
screen data of the previous NT31/NT31C.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a
memory unit.
• Screen data for two PTs.
• System program for two PTs.
• System program and screen data for one PT.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note 1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis-
connecting a memory unit.
After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT31/NT31C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
Reference: S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the oper-
ating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting
NT31/NT31C operation.
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT mod-
els: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (with or without the Vj suffix). One
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. How-
ever, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and
NT631/NT631C, an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data
with an NT31C. (The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be cor-
rect since these models have different numbers of colors.
S One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different
models. In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT model.
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.
3-5-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below (the expansion interface
connector is located underneath the note label.).
Mounting screws
3-5-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Note 1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
DIP Switch Functions
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
• SW1
Switch
Function
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
SW1-1
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to
the memory unit)
SW1-2
SW1-3
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Screen data
SW1-4 Data type to transfer
ON : System
program
• SW2
Switch
Function
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
SW2-1 Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2-2 Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2-3 Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission. *
SW2-4 System/Screen simultaneous transmission
* The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of
areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which
of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference: S The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to NT31/NT31C
with the Vj suffix.
S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
S In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
• An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT
system program area.
• An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data
area.
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 45).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly
written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera-
tion site is using the system.
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into only one
Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the
memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to
NT31/NT31C.
SW2
SW1
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the PT),
but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating
errors.
Reference: S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and the screen
data into bank 1 at all times.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
Finished
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
Writing Screen Data to
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly
written to NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or
system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same
system program or screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes
convenient.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of
NT31/NT31C also changes.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT31/NT31C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
Reference: S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
S Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes possible
only if the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
S When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are dis-
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
Finished
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows.
SW2
SW1
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
Display language select screen appears.
3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display lan-
guage.
The following descriptions are for when English is selected.
The screen shown below is displayed.
Current PT Screen Data, System
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system pro-
gram inside PT.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)
Current PT Screen Data, Screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
• In the case of system program:
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside the
memory unit.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system pro-
gram inside the memory unit.
(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some
models.)
• In the case of screen data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of
the origin of transmitting as described in the table below.
Source
[PT]screen
Destination
[Memory unit] Bank 1
[Memory unit] Bank 0
[PT]system
[PT]system/screen
[Memory unit] Bank 0
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 (fixed)
S If system program is selected
[PT]system (fixed)
S If screen data is selected
[PT]screen (fixed)
[Memory unit] Bank 1
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 [PT]system/screen (fixed)
Reference: S When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from
the PT to the memory unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system program,
Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the
PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
S When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
4. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-
played in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the same
time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of
the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN LED remains OFF.
5. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to
the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content of
error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the au-
tomatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Section 3-5
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is pos-
sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above re-
mains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error Writing to the data write
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
(automatic
destination has been
transmission)
prohibited by the setting switches correctly, then turn the
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error Writing to the data write
Perform either of the following
procedures.
(manual
destination has been
transmission)
prohibited by the setting S Press the OK touch switch to re-
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
turn to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
Flash memory error An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power
initialization of the OFF, then back ON. If the error
NT31/NT31C or memory recurs, the flash memory at the
unit flash memory, or write destination may be faulty. In
during write processing. this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power
verification processing at OFF, then back ON. If the error
the flash memory of the
NT31/NT31C or the
memory unit.
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Transmitting data
error
(The automatic
transmission only)
An attempt is made to
transmit data other than procedures.
a system program or the S Turn the NT31/NT31C power
Perform either of the following
system program of a
different PC model into
the NT31/NT31C as the
system program.
An attempt is made to
write a system program
into the NT31/NT31C as
screen data.
OFF, correct the DIP switch set-
tings of the memory unit, and
then turn the power back ON.
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the DIP switch settings
to the manual transmission, and
then check the data inside the
memory unit.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with the basic versions of the
NT31/NT31C PTs (NT31-ST121j-E or NT31C-ST141j-E).
Reference: In this case, the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the
NT31/NT31C without the Vj suffix. (The system program transmission by using
a memory unit cannot be processed.)
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that screen data can be changed
easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be
changed simply by changing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note 1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis-
connecting a memory unit. After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten
its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT31/NT31C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
Reference: S When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the oper-
ating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting
NT31/NT31C operation.
S Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT mod-
els: NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C (with or without the Vj suffix). One
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. How-
ever, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and
NT631/NT631C, the data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it
through a conversion (the data must be converted using the Support Tool).
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be cor-
rect since these models have different numbers of colors.
The screen data for NT31/NT31C PTs with system program Ver. 2 or later
cannot be used with PTs with system program earlier than Ver. 2.
S The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
3-6-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below. (The expansion interface
connector is located underneath the note label.)
Mounting screws
3-6-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Note 1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
DIP Switch Functions
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
• SW1
Switch
Function
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
SW1-1
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to
the memory unit)
SW1-2
SW1-3
OFF: Not executed
ON : Executed
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
SW1-4 Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
• SW2
Switch
SW2-1 Disable/enable writing to PT
Function
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
SW2-2 Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2-3 Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission.
SW2-4 Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
* The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area (bank 0,
bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of
these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference: S In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
S In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
• Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2-1
or SW2-2.
S For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 3 to 25).
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly written to the
memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera-
tion site is using the system.
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (there is no effect on the other area).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the
memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT31/NT31C.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit. To operate
NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Writing Screen Data to
In this mode, screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is
used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or
screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes convenient.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in NT31/NT31C.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are dis-
played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, and remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual trans-
mission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen shown below is displayed.
(Example)
Current PT Screen Data
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here.
Pressing the Trans. Direction Change and Bank Change touch switches chan-
ges the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the memory
unit used.
3. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are dis-
played in accordance with the progress of data transmission.
4. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is pos-
sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above re-
mains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error Writing to the data write
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
(automatic
destination has been
transmission)
prohibited by the setting switches correctly, then turn the
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error Writing to the data write
Perform either of the following
procedures.
(manual
destination has been
transmission)
prohibited by the setting S Press the OK touch switch to re-
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
turn to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
S Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section 3-6
Error
Flash memory error An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power
initialization of the OFF, then back ON. If the error
NT31/NT31C or memory recurs, the flash memory at the
unit flash memory, or write destination may be faulty. In
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
during write processing. this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during Turn the NT31/NT31C power
verification processing at OFF, then back ON. If the error
the flash memory of the
NT31/NT31C or the
memory unit.
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
79
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
4-1 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the
RS-232C port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Con-
nection Manual (V060-E1-j).
Direct Connection Between The RS-232C Ports Using an RS-232C Cable
(Page 111)
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the con-
nection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)
Reference: The CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link meth-
od. Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection.
For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 72) or Using the High-
speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75).
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports of
both units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in.
In the CS1-series or CQM1H PCs, the host link method can be used by installing
a Serial Communication Board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have
an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a
Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PC, the type of installed Serial Communica-
tion Board, Serial Communication Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a con-
nection.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the host link method
using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
CPUs Connectable with Host Link
Units or Expansion Communication
Board
PC Se-
ries
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
Host Link Unit/
Communication Board
Connectable
to
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CS1 Se-
ries
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G
CS1H
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
---
C120-LK201-EV1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
---
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200H-LK201-EV1
C200HX-Z
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E
---
---
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-E
C20HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C1000H
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C200HG-CPU43/63-E
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64-E
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE
C200HW-COM02/04/
05/06-EV1
C Series
---
---
C500-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000HF-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H (F)
C2000H
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-j
+CPM1-CIF01
---
---
---
---
CPM1
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-j
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM2A-30/40/60CDjj-j
+CPM1-CIF01
(Peripheral port connection)
---
---
---
CPM2A
CPM2C-10/20jjjjjj-j
(*1)
---
---
CPM2C
CQM1
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61 (*2)
---
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CQM1H-SCB41
CQM1H
CV500
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV Se-
ries (*3)
CV1000
CV2000
CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201
CVM1
Series
(*3)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
Compo-
Bus/S
master
control
unit
SRM1-C02-V1
---
---
SRM1
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a
CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.
*3: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Settings at the Host
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at the
host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or
settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
(*1)
Communications speed
Transfer code
Parity
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even
(*2)
1-to-1/1-to-N
Instruction level
Unit #
1-to-N
Level 1, 2, 3
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 160).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C-series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Backplane mounted type:
C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW1
SW3
SW2
0
0
5
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
SW4
Set this switch to 2.
2
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
ON
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
1
2
3
Set #3 to ON.
4
CTS selector switch
External
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
0V (ON)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
C1000H(F)/C2000H Backplane mounted type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Local
Host
Mode control (key switch)
Set this to host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
8
7
6
5
RS-422A
RS-232C
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
4
3
2
1
SW1
Synchronization
Internal
External
ON
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
Terminator
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
ON
SW2
CTS
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
0V
External
ON
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
C1000H/C2000H Backplane mounted type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
5V supply
ON
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
SW1
Synchronization
Internal
ON
External
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminator
OFF
ON
SW2
CTS
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
0V
External
ON
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0).
(Set this always to 0V.)
@ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to ON (1), and
SW3-4 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.)
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series backplane mounted type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (commu-
nication ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an
NT31/NT31C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at these
ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be pre-
pared.
• Communication port 1
Communication port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
• Communication port 2
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C meth-
od, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-232C
(the upper position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following commu-
nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Communications speed
Transfer code
Parity
Setting at Host
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even
(*1)
(*2)
1-to-1, 1-to-N
Instruction level
1-to-N
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page160).
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYS-
MAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).
Setting the Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communication port 2, set these
switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.)
I/O port selector switch
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use
communication port 2, set SW3.
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
Connecting to a CS1-series Serial Communication Unit
CS1 series Backplane mounted type: CS1W-SCU21
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
No.
C
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
m=DM30000+100×unit # (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 1
Port 2
host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
m
m+10
8000
0000
0007
0000
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
Communication speed 19200 bps.
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
m+1
m+11
m+2
m+6
m+12
m+16
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CV-series and CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPU Units
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup.
Item
Communications speed
Stop bit
Setting at Host
(*1)
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C
2 stop bits
Even
Parity
Data length
Unit #
ASCII 7 bits
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 160).
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support
software), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000 Op-
eration Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Setting the Front Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
@ System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,
set SW4 to ON.
To effect the existing PC Setup, set SW4
to OFF.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
Note
RS-422A
For CPUs manufactured before or during
June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the existing
DIP switch settings differ from the
existing PC Setup as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC Setup:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also are
9,600 bps and 2 stop bits.
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CQM1H CPUs, SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in
the following table.
PC model
Connection method
C200HS, CQM1
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E • Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a
Serial Communications Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable.
• Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Commu-
nications Board.
CPM1
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
CPM2A, SRM1
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
CPM2C
Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111,
CS1W-CN118, or CS1W-CN114).
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this
peripheral port.)
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
PC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU, or SRM1, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup area.
Item
Communication mode
Communications speed
Stop bit
Setting at Host
Host link mode
(*1)
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C
2 stop bits
Even
Parity
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
00
Unit #
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page160).
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. the
CX-Programmer support software).
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral port connection
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6650 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6653 0000
Unit # 00
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other than
the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C port connection
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6645 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6646 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6648 0000
Unit # 00
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port A
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board port 1
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6555 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6558 0000
Unit # 00
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port B
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6550 0001
DM6551 0303
0304
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6553 0000
Unit # 00
CPM1: Peripheral port connection through a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6650 0001
Host link mode
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6653 0000
Unit # 00
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111 Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
CPM2C
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the
PC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made
in PC Setup effective.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
S Connecting PT to peripheral port
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1-
CIF01
CPM1
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-E (-V1)
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU, or the RS-232C port of the
communication board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be
made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connect-
ing to a peripheral port.
PC Setup
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-
tions for the PC Setup area. Since the settings shown below are the PC default
settings for the CPU, no change to the PC Setup is necessary as long as the
communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps.
Item
Communication speed
Stop bits
Setting at Host
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)
2 stop bits
Even
Parity
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
00
Unit No. for the host link
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page 160). When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps, the PC
Setup of the CPU need to be changed.
Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming
Console), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Pro-
grammer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
160
8000
0000
0007
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
Unit #00
161
166
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
144
8000
0000
0007
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
Unit #00
145
150
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS1-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 1
Port 2
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
DM32000
DM32001
DM32010
8000
0000
0007
0000
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
Communication speed 19200 bps.
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
DM32011
DM32002
DM32006
DM32012
DM32016
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link (1:1) function built in.
With CQM1H PCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1:1
NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected
by the NT link (1:1) method by installing a Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:1)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
CPUs Connectable with
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
Connectable
to
Expansion
PC Series
Communication
(*1)
Board
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
---
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG
(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-Z)E
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
---
C series
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CPM1
CPM2A-30CDjj-j
CPM2A-40CDjj-j
CPM2A-60CDjj-j
---
CPM2A
CPM2C
(*3)
(*3)
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j
CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
---
---
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1
(*4)
(*4)
CQM1H-CPU21-E
CQM1H-CPU51-E
CQM1H-CPU61-E
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
---
---
---
---
CV500
(*5)
CV series
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1 series
CVM1
SRM1
(*5)
CompoBus/S
master
---
SRM1-C02-V1
control unit
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.
*2 A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.
*3 Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*4 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*5 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
Reference: CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 72) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75).
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Settings at The Host
The setting methods for each unit are as follows:
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or SRM1
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Host Model
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
RS-232C port of C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1
DM6645
(*1)
Use NT link
(1:1)
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
4000
DM6555
(*2)
Port 1 of CQM1H
(*1)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CPM1
DM6550
DM6650
*1 RS-232C port of the Communication Board
*2 RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111 Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
CPM2C
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
Setting the DIP Switches on the Front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1,
CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the
PC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings
made in PC Setup effective.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
S Connecting PT to peripheral port
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
S Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1-
CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-EVj)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
Set SW3 to use NT link
(ON, right side).
ON
OFF
ON
When using the CVM1/CV series, CPU execution processing (execution control
2) in the PC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are the
CS1-series CS1G/H and the C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, and
SRM1 only. With the CS1-series PCs, it is possible to connect a 1:N NT Link us-
ing a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the model and series of the PC as well as the model of Serial Commu-
nications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:N)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
CPUs Connectable with
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
Connectable
to
PC Series
Communications Board
(*1)
or Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/
45-EV1
CS1G
CS1H
45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
66/67-EV1
CS1 series
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
66/67-EV1
(*2)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE
(-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG
(-Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C series
(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX
(-Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(*3)
CQM1H-CPU51
---
CQM1H
SRM1
(*3)
CQM1H-CPU61
CompoBus/S
Master
Control Unit
SRM1-C02-V2
---
*1 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
*2 One of the following Communication Boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)
*3 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Reference: The -V1 versions of CS1-series PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well
as the standard 1:N NT Link. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link can be
used in earlier versions of CS1-series PCs by installing a new version of Serial
Communications Board or Unit. For details, refer to Using the High-speed NT
Link (1:N) Method (page 75).
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Writing
Value
Connection to
Word #
Setting
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1
Built-in RS-232C port
DM6645
Use NT link (1:N)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
*1
j = highest unit number of
Communication Board port A
DM6555
DM6550
5j00
the connected PTs (1 to 7)
*2
CQM1H port 1
(*3)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
*1
Communication Board port B
*1 RS-232C port on the Communications Board
*2 RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board
*3 When using a C200HE (-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
Refer to the PC’s operation manual for details on changing PC Setup settings.
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area (data
memory) effective.
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC
Setup effective.
Connecting to CS1-series CPU Units
CS1-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPUjj-E(V1)
The PT is connected to the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or an RS-232C
port on a Communications Board. It can also be connected to the peripheral port
on the CPU Unit, but a CS1W-CN118 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable must be
used.
PC Setup
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-
tions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
161
166
0000 to 0009
Communications baud rate (standard)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
000j
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
145
150
0000 to 0009
Communications baud rate (standard)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
000j
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2-5 to the built-in RS-232C port,
for example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Con-
sole), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Program-
mer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
Peripheral port
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001
Port 2
DM32010
DM32011
(*1)
0000 to 0009
Communications baud rate
(standard)
j = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 – 7)
DM32006
DM32016
000j
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1, for example, set the
value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 0000 Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
No.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
Port 1
Port 2
m+10
m
(*1)
m+1
m+11
0000 to 0009
Communications baud rate
(standard)
j = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 - 7)
m+6
m+16
000j
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only the -V1 versions of OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high-
speed 1:N NT Link directly. Other CS1-series PCs can use the high-speed 1:N
NT Link indirectly through a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit. (If a
Serial Communications Unit is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1”
suffix can be connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Serial Communications
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPUs Connectable only through a
Serial Communication Board or Unit
(*1)
(*2)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
(*1)
(*2)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
*1 The high-speed 1:N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the CPU
Unit of a CS1-series PC without the -V1 suffix.
*2 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting CS1-series CPU Units
CS1 series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPUjj-EV1
PC Setup
When connecting to a CS1 series CPU, set the following communication condi-
tions for the PC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
161
166
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
000j
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
145
150
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
000j
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in
RS-232C port, for example, set the value 8200 Hex to word 160, 000A Hex to
word 161, and 0005 Hex to word 166.
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Con-
sole), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Program-
mer) to the CPU.
For details on PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS1-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-j).
Reference: When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the com-
munications baud rate to 115,200 bps.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
Peripheral port
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports
connection of RS-232C
devices.)
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in ac-
cordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection of RS-232C
devices.
(This also supports the
connection of
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing
Settings
Value
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001
Port 2
DM32010
DM32011
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
DM32006
DM32016
000j
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 1,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 000A Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit
A CS1 series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
No.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Word m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing
Settings
Value
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+10
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
m+1
m+6
m+11
m+16
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 - 7)
000j
When Using the Memory
Link Method
In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer
with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to create
a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the follow-
ing table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C by the
memory switch. (page 165).
Item
Input/Output port
Communication speed
Data bits length
Stop bits length
Parity
Settings at the host
RS-232C
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
7 bits, 8 bits
1 bits, 2 bits
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT31/NT31C and
the host is described here.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
SYSMAC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC,
PLC, SRM1
Serial port A (RS-232C, 9-pin type)
Serial port B (RS-232C, 25-pin type)
9-pin connector
9-pin connector
or 25-pin
connector
Cable with RS-232C connectors
Recommended Connector Cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
Delivered with
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
9-pin
XM2A-0901
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Made by OMRON
Connector
C500-LK203
25-pin
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
XM24-2501
DB-25P
Made by OMRON
25-pin
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
9-pin
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2S-0911
Made by OMRON
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
Connector
hood
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
C500-LK203
25-pin
Made by OMRON
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
XM2S-2511
DB-C2-J9
25-pin
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
AWG28 5P
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable
IFVV-SB
Cable
CO-MA-VV-SB
Made by Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.
5P 28AWG
Note After connecting a communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
OMRON Cables with Connectors
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link meth-
od, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.
Model
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T
Cable Length
Connector Specification
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are avail-
able.
Model
Cable Length
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
CV500-CN228
XW2Z-S002
2 m
2 m
9-pin ⇔ 9 pin
When a connection is made at serial port B in other than the memory link meth-
od, OMRON cables with connectors shown are available.
Model
XW2Z-200P
XW2Z-500P
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
Cable Length
Connector Specification
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
25-pin ⇔ 25 pin
25-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Note The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Wiring for a Host Link
Unit (25-pin) Connection
Applicable units: C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:
XW2Z-200P (25-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500P (25-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communica-
tion port 2). When using communication port 2, refer to Wiring for Other Connec-
tions (Other Than the Memory Link Method) (page81).
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Serial Port A
1
14
NT31/NT31C
PC (host link unit)
6
1
Pin
Pin
Abbreviation
FG
Abbreviation
number
Connector
hood
Shielding wire
number
1
FG
2
1
2
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
3
4
5
SD
RD
RS
RS-232C
interface
3
4
5
RS-232C
interface
CS
*
6
7
8
–
+5V
5G
–
6
7
8
9
–
–
–
5G
(9-pin type)
9
5
–
–
–
ER
(25-pin type)
13
25
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.
Serial Port B
NT31/NT31C
PC (host link unit)
Pin
Pin
Abbreviation
Abbreviation
number
Shielding wire
number
Connector
hood
FG
–
FG
1
2
1
2
SD
RD
RS
CS
1
14
1
14
SD
RD
RS
CS
3
4
5
RS-232C
interface
3
4
5
RS-232C/
422A/485
interface
*
–
6
7
8
–
–
–
SG
–
SG
–
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
–
TRM
9
10
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
–
11
20
ER
–
12
13
14
–
(25-pin
type)
–
SDA (–)
RDA (–)
–
15
16
–
–
23
24
RSB (+)
13
25
13
25
RSA (–)
–
25
(25-pin type)
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.
Wiring for Other
Connections
Applicable units :
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1A-10CDj-j
CPM1A-30CDj-j
CPM2A-30CDj-j
CPM2A-60CDj-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1A-20CDj-j
CPM1A-40CDj-j
CPM2A-40CDj-j
CPM2C-10jjjjjj-j CPM2C-20jjjjjj-j
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CUP67-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:
XW2Z-200S (25-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (25-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected by
any connection method.
Serial Port A
6
6
NT31/NT31C
PC (Host link unit)
1
1
Pin
Pin
Abbreviation
Abbreviation
number
number
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
–
FG
SD
1
2
1
2
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
–
RD
RS
3
4
5
RS-232C
interface
3
4
5
RS-232C
interface
CS
+5V
*
6
7
8
9
DSR
ER
6
7
8
9
–
SG
SG
(9-pin type)
9
9
5
5
(9-pin type)
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Serial Port B
NT31/NT31C
PC (Host link unit)
Abbreviation
FG
Shielding wire
1
14
FG
–
1
2
–
1
2
6
1
SD
RD
RS
CS
SD
RD
RS
CS
3
4
5
3
4
5
*
–
–
–
SG
–
6
7
8
9
6
7
8
–
SG
TRM
9
10
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
(9-pin type)
11
–
12
13
14
–
–
9
5
SDA (–)
RDA (–)
–
15
16
13
25
–
–
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (–)
–
(25-pin type)
* In case 0V is set for those unit which has CTS setting selector, it is not necessary
to shorten between RS and CS.
Wiring for a Memory Link
Connection
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
CV500-CN228 (9-pin⇔25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin⇔9-pin, 2 m)
Serial Port A
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
PC (Host link unit)
NT31/NT31C
6
Abbreviation
1
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
FG
−
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD
RS-232C
RD
RS-232C
connector
connector
RS
CS
SG
−
SG
(9-pin type)
9
5
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Section 4-1
Serial Port B
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
NT31/NT31C
PC (Host link unit)
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
1
14
Connector
hood
Connector
FG
hood
–
1
2
SD
SD
RD
RS
CS
RS-232C
connector
RD
RS
CS
SG
RS-232C
/422A/485
connector
3
4
5
–
SG
–
6
7
8
TRM
9
10
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
11
–
12
13
14
–
–
SDA (–)
RDA (–)
–
15
16
13
25
–
–
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (–)
–
(25-pin type)
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . . .
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . .
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .
86
87
88
92
97
99
100
101
117
121
122
125
127
128
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
5-1 Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the
RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Con-
nection Manual (V060-E1-j).
• Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port
of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A con-
vertor unit (page 88).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
Host
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port of
the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A conver-
tor unit (page 88).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method of
type RS-485.
PT
Host
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 92).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) meth-
od.
PT
Host
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. total length
500 m)
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-232C
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit (page 92).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. total length
500 m)
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PC
(At termination)
PC
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT31
NT31C
(Not at
termination)
NT31
(Not at
termination)
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
(At
(Not at
termination)
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) method
(page 72) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) method (page 75).
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the
host side RS-232C.
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.
Method
Host link
Reference
Host Link Method (page 54)
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)
NT Link (1:1) method (page 67)
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 72)
High-speed NT link (1:N) Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 75)
Memory link Memory Link Method (page 78)
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Settings at the
RS-232C/RS-422A
Convertor Unit
(NT-AL001)
When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as fol-
lows.
Example: the terminal resistor is active,
RS-422A, NT link (1:N).
ON
omRon
NT-AL001
1
2
3
4
5
6
Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to ON (to
activate the built-in terminal resistor).
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to
OFF (to inactivate the built-in terminal resistor).
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)
For host link or NT link (1:1), set both of these switches to
OFF. (Always send)
For NT link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.
(Sends when CS is H)
Note Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the unit.
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT31/NT31C and
the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
25-pin type)
SYSMAC
C-series PC,
CVM1/CV-series PC, SRM1
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
25-pin connector
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. length: 500 m)
RS-232C cable
with connectors
RS-422A terminal block
9-pin connector
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
1
14
Connector
FG
hood
−
1
2
8
6
4
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
7
5
3
1
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
NT-AL001 side
−
8
TRM
9
Pin number Abbreviation
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
5
4
3
1
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDB (+)
RS-422A
terminal
block
−
−
Functional
ground
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-485
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
1
−
1
2
14
8
6
4
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
7
5
3
1
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
NT-AL001 side
−
8
TRM
9
Pin number Abbreviation
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
5
4
3
1
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDB (+)
RS-422A
terminal
block
−
−
Functional
ground
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
Shielding wire
−
−
13
25
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connection between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit (25-pin)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK201-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communica-
tion port 2). When using the communication port, refer to Wiring for Connections
other than Memory Link (page 90).
PC (host link unit) side
NT-AL001 side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
1
Abbreviation Pin number
FG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
−
14
hood
Shielding wire
6
1
Connector
hood
FG
1
−
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
connector
4
5
6
7
SG
−
8
−
−
−
SG
−
−
−
(9-pin type)
−
−
9
5
20
ER
(25-pin type)
13
25
Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link
Applicable units:
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-
j
CPM1-20CDR-
j
CPM1A-10CDj-
CPM1A-30CDj-
j
j
CPM1A-20CDj-
CPM1A-40CDj-
j
j
CPM2A-30CD
j
j
j
-
j
j
CPM2A-40CD
j
j
-
j
CPM2A-60CD
j
-
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-20
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HE-CPU32-ZE
C200HG-CPU33-ZE
C200HG-CPU53-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-ZE
C200HX-CPU54-ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43-ZE
C200HG-CPU63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44-ZE
C200HX-CPU64-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link and 1:1 NT Link only (+5 V power wire attached)
SJ45007-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
SSJ45007-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj can-
not be connected by any connection method.
NT-AL001 side
PC side
6
1
6
1
Pin number
Abbreviation Pin number
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
Connector
FG
FG
−
hood
−
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD
RD
RS
CS
(+5V)
−
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
connector
−
−
SG
SG
Shielding wire
9
(9-pin type)
(9-pin type)
9
5
5
When there is no +5 V output at the PC side
When there is +5 V output at the PC side
When using host link or NT link (1:1)
When using NT link (1:N)
• When using the host link or NT link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS termi-
nals at the PC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals at the NT-
AL001 side open).
• When using the NT link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at the
NT-AL001 and PC sides.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
If there is +5 V output at the PC side, no external power supply is required for
the NT-AL001.
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.
Host side
Abbreviation
NT-AL001 side
6
1
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD
RD
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
connector
RS
CS
(+5V)
SG
−
SG
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
9
5
No +5 V output is at the host side
A +5 V output is present at the host side
Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NT-AL001,
supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NT-
AL001 is required.
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple
NT31/NT31Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connec-
tion is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
25-pin type)
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector
25-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-232C cable with
connectors
RS-422A terminal 9-pin connector
block
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. total length: 500 m)
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and
NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
NT31/NT31C side
1
14
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
Shielding wire
FG
hood
8
6
4
2
−
1
2
7
5
3
1
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
NT-AL001 side
−
8
TRM
9
Pin number Abbreviation
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
5
4
3
1
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A
terminal
block
RDB (+)
−
−
Functional
ground
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and
NT-AL001 (RS-485)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-485
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
Connector
FG
hood
8
6
4
2
−
1
2
7
5
3
1
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
SD
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
NT-AL001 side
−
8
TRM
9
Pin number Abbreviation
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
5
4
3
1
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RS-422A
terminal
block
SDB (+)
−
−
Functional
ground
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not make the connections between the
functional ground of the NT-AL001 and the shielding.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connection between
NT31/NT31C Units
(RS-422A)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
:
1
1
14
14
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
FG
hood
−
1
2
1
2
−
SD
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
−
6
6
−
SG
7
7
SG
−
8
8
−
:
TRM
9
9
TRM
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
−
−
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
13
25
−
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
(25-pin type)
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C
(marked : in the figure above) only.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connec-
tor hood and the shielding at one side only.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Connection between
NT31/NT31C Units
(RS-485)
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay termi-
nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
:
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
1
1
14
14
Abbreviation Pin number
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
Connector
FG
FG
hood
−
−
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
SD
SD
RD
RD
3
3
RS
RS
4
4
CS
CS
5
5
−
−
6
6
SG
SG
7
7
−
−
8
8
:
TRM
TRM
9
9
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
13
25
−
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C (marked
:
i
n
t
h
e
f
i
g
u
r
e
a
b
o
v
e
)
.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, make the connection between the connec-
tor hood and the shielding at the one side only.
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring when connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications Board,
CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Com-
munications Board.
Applicable PCs:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PC)
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
NT-AL001 side
PC side
6
6
1
1
Abbreviation Pin number
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
Connector
FG
FG
hood
hood
−
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
−
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
connector
−
−
SG
SG
9
9
(9-pin type)
(9-pin type)
5
5
Since the CS1G/H, CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have a +5 V output,
no external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-232C
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recom-
mended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with one
connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
Delivered with
CS1-series CS1G/H
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
9-pin type
XM2A-0901
Made by OMRON
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
C500-LK203
25-pin type
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
XM2A-2501
DB-25P
Made by OMRON
25-pin type
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Name
Model
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0913
Remarks
9-pin type
Delivered with
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Made by OMRON
Made by OMRON 9-pin
---
Connector
hood
XM2S-0911-E Made by OMRON 9-pin
CS1 series CS1G/CS1H
C500-LK203
25-pin type
XM2S-2511
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
Made by OMRON
25-pin type
DB-C2-J9
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
AWG28 5P
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
---
---
IFVV-SB
Cable
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PC, use the OMRON cables with connec-
tors indicated in the table below.
Model
Cable Length
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25-pin
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
1 m
Host link, NT link (1:1)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
SJ45007-102
SJ45007-202
XW2Z-070T-1
XW2Z-200T-1
SJ46006-102
SJ46006-202
Host link, NT link (1:1)
2 m
0.7 m
2 m
+5 V power supply wire attached
(Use when the PC does not have a +5 V output.)
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)
+5 V power supplied from PC
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)
1 m
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)
2 m
+5 V power supplied from PC
(Use when the PC has a +5 V output.)
Note The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed
this load.
• After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.
• Recommended connectors, cables and crimp terminals for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the
recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied
with one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Section 5-1
Name
Model
Maker
Remarks
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
XM2A-2501
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
Connector
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
DB-25P F-N
XM2S-2511
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
Connector
hood
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
DB-C2-J9
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
Cable
TKVVBS4P-03
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm )
Crimp
terminals
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
2
Molex Inc.
The terminal screws of the NT-AL001 are M3 specification. When wiring,
use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.5 N@m.
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
6.2 mm or less
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting
terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting termi-
nals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω. When
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at
the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s con-
nector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the
Cable, page 267.
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood
-
Terminal resistor setting
-
-
9
TRM
10
11
12
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
-
-
-
25
-
Pin Nos. 9 and 10
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
Reference: S The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.
+
10 (RDB)
−
16 (RDA)
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
9 (TRM)
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT-AL001-E, refer to Settings
at the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001-E) (page 88).
5-2 Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the
RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following meth-
ods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs, re-
fer to the PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-j).
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are con-
nected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 117).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are connected
by an RS-485 cable (page 121).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) of type RS-485.
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 122).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. total length 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-485
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 125).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. total length 500 m)
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PC
(At termination)
PC
PC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT31
NT31C
(Not at
termination)
NT31
(Not at
termination)
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
(At
(Not at
termination)
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) Method
(page 113) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) Method (page 115).
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the
RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C, and the settings to be made at the host,
are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A/485 type host link
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
function built in. With the CS1-series and CQM1H, the host link method can be
used by installing a serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E devices have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link
method by installing a communication board.
With the CPM2A and CPM2C, an RS-422A type of 1:1 NT Link can be created
through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Check the model and series of the PC and the type of the installed Board or Unit
before making a connection.
The host units featuring the RS-422A/485 type host link function and can be con-
nected to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table
below.
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
CPUs Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communication Board
Connectable
to
PC Series
Host Link Unit /
CPU
Communication Board
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G
CS1H
CS1 series
CS1W-SCB41-E
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200H-LK202-V1
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200HX-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HW-COM03/06-EV1
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE C200HX-ZE
C200HX
C series
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-
j
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM1
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CDj-
j
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM2A-30/40/60CDj-
j
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM2A
(Peripheral port connection)
(*1)
CPM2C-10/20 j-
j
j
j
j
j
j
CPM2C
CQM1H
CV500
CQM1H-SCB41
CV500-LK201
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV series
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000
(*2)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1 se-
ries
CV500-LK201
CVM1
(*2)
SRM1
SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11
SRM1
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
The host link method cannot be used when an NT31/NT31C is connected using
RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Settings at the Host
When using the RS-422A type host link method, the settings shown below must
be made at the host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
(*1)
Communications speed
Transfer code
Parity
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even
(*2)
1-to-1/1-to-N
Instruction level
Unit #
1-to-N
Level 1, 2, 3
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 158).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E
Backplane mounting type: C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW1
SW3
SW2
0
0
5
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
SW4
Set this switch to 2.
2
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
Terminator
ON
1-to-1 (ON)
1-to-N (OFF)
OFF
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)
Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF).
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Mode
selector
Host Local
@ Mode selector (key switch)
Set this to Host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
I/O port
8
RS-422A
7
RS-232C
6
SW1
5
4
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
3
Synchronization
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
2
Internal
1
External
ON
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
Terminator
8
7
OFF
6
ON
SW2
5
4
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
CTS
3
2
0V
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19200 bps.
External
1
ON
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
5V supply
ON
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SW1
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
Synchronization
Internal
ON
External
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminator
OFF
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
CTS
0V
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
External
ON
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
SW2
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
SW3
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1).
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to OFF (0).
(Set terminator ON.)
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series rack-mounting type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (commu-
nication ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A type host link method, set commu-
nication port 2 to RS-422A.
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method,
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-422A (the
lower position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following commu-
nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Communications speed
Transfer code
Parity
Setting at Host
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even
(*1)
(*2)
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 158).
*1 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYS-
MAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-j).
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
Set these switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9,600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this to ON.
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PC Setup.
Item
Communications speed
Stop bit
Setting at Host
(*1)
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.
2 stop bits
Even
Parity
Data length
Unit #
ASCII 7 bits
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 158).
Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support
software), or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU.
For details on the PC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-j).
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method
selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to OFF.
(for host link communication)
@ Host link default value settings
(DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
To effect the values set in the PC Setup,
set SW4 to OFF.
RS-422A
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No.
j
j
6
5
)
,
t
h
e
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the PC Setup default values as follows.
- Existing DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC Setup default values:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7
bit data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No.
j
j
7
5
)
,
t
h
e
s
t
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used, as shown in
the following table.
PC model
Connection method
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E • Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications
Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Commu-
nications Board.
CPM1
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
CPM2A, SRM1
CPM2C
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
• Connect to the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or
CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.)
Reference: S There are no Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in which
port B is the RS-422A port.
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A port.
PC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
CQM1H CPUs or SRM1, set the following communication conditions for the PC
Setup area.
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communication mode
Communications speed
Stop bit
Host link mode
(*1)
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C.
2 stop bits
Even
Parity
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
00
Unit #
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 158).
Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-
Programmer).
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC which is used.
The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6555 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6558 0000
Unit # 00
When using a CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6650 0001
DM6651 0303
0304
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6653 0000
When using a CQM1H
Unit # 00
Word # Writing Value
Settings
DM6550 0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551 0303
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
DM6553 0000
Unit # 00
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and
peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using
the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the fol-
lowing table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
CPM2C
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
Setting Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1:
Switch 2 :
Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Setting the Switches on an RS-422A Adapter
CPM1-
CIF11
CPM1
Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position).
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series
CPU Type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Allocation DM
area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, data length 7 bits,
even parity,
DM32011
0000
0007
0000
0000
Communication speed
Communication speed
Transmit delay time
No CTS control
9600 bps.
19200 bps.
DM32012
DM32016
0 ms.
Unit No.0 for host link
Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS-422A type NT link (1:1)
function built in.
• The C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT
link (1:1) method by installing a Communications Board.
• The CQM1H CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) meth-
od by installing a Serial Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the
connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C by
the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.
CPUs with Built-in RS-422A type NT
PC Series
Model Name
C200HE (-Z)E
Link (1:1) Function
(*1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
(*1)
(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX (-Z)E
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
C series
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CQM1H
CV500
CV series
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000
(*2)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
series
CVM1
(*2)
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix -EVj cannot be connected.
The NT link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT link (1:1)
method, connect by RS-422A.
NT link connection using RS-422A/485 is not possible with CPM1.
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
• Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PC Setup
When connecting to the CVM1/CV series CPU by the NT link (1:1) method, no
particular settings are required at the PC Setup.
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method selection
(selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
I/O port selector switch
Set this switch to ON.
RS-232C
(for communication by NT link)
RS-422A
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CQM1H
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the PC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model.
Host Model
Word # Writing Value
Setting
*1
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
DM6555
DM6550
4000
4000
Use NT link (1:1)
*2
Port 2 of CQM1H
*1 RS-422A port of the communication board
*1 RS-422A port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PC you are using.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 type NT link
(1:N) method are the CS1G/H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and CQM1H models only.
A Serial Communications Board or a communications board must be installed to
make the connection.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communica-
tions board before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT31/NT31C by
the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) function via a convertor are indicated in the table
below.
CPUs with Built-in
RS-422A type
NT Link (1:N) Function
CPU that becomes
connectable by installing a
communication board
PC
Series
Model Name
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
(*1)
CS1G
CS1H
CS1
series
---
---
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/
(*1)
67-E(V1)
(*2)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE
(-Z)E
(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
---
C200HG (-Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
(*2)
C series
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX
(-Z)E
---
---
(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(*3)
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H
*1 The serial CS1W-SCB41-E communication board is required.
*1 A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 communication board is required.
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E and CQM1H
PC Setup Area Settings
Write the communication conditions directly into the PC Setup area (data
memory) using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Connection to
Word # Writing Value
Setting
Port A of a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E
Use NT link (1:N)
DM6555
DM6550
5
j
0
0
*1
j
=
h
i
g
h
e
s
t
u
n
i
t
n
u
m
b
e
r
o
f
t
h
e
*3
connected PTs (1 to 7)
*2
Port 2 of a CQM1H
5j 00
*1 The Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*1 The Serial Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*1 When using C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
For details on setting the PC Setup area settings, refer to the PC’s operation
manual.
Reference: S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in
which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.
S There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A/485 port.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A), or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
When using RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
When using RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS1 series
CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)
Set to ON (Terminal resistance is present.) (right side)
OFF
2
ON TERM
4
WIRE
Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A : 4 (4 wire type) (right side)
For RS-485 : 2 (2 wire type) (left side)
Port 2
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
RS-422A/485
SCB41
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power
ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the
STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM
area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8200
0000 to 0009
000
NT link (1:N) mode
Communications baud rate (standard)
= The largest model number of the con-
nected PT (0 – 7)
(*1)
DM32011
DM32016
j
j
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2 in
the NT link (1:N), set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010, 0000 Hex for DM32011,
and 0006 Hex for D32016.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link
through RS-422A/RS-485. The high-speed 1:N NT Link must be established
through a CS1W-SCB41-E Serial Communications Board. (If a Serial Commu-
nications Board is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be
connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Board/Unit before trying to
establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS1-series PCs can be connected to an
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link through RS-422A/RS-485.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
PCs supporting direct connection to PCs supporting connection through a
the CPU Unit
Serial Communication Board
(*1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
---
(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
*1 A CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS-422A/485 port for CS1-se-
ries CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num-
ber 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
OFF
2
ON TERM
4
WIRE
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
RS-422A:Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
Port 2
RS-422A/485
SCB41
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CX-
Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following table, the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and
settings are shown.
Allocation DM area
Writing
Settings
Value
8200
000A
Port 2
DM32010
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32011
DM32016
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
j = The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
000j
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32010, 000A Hex to DM32011, and 0006 Hex to
DM32016.
When using the Memory
Link Method
With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal com-
puter and an FA computer with RS-422A.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to
create a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.),
its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in
the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C
by the memory switch. (page 165).
Item
Input/Output board
Communication speed
Data bits length
Stop bits length
Parity
Setting at Host
RS-422A
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
7 bits, 8 bits
1 bit, 2 bits
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, XON/XOFF
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT31/NT31C and a
host are connected is described here.
Host link/CPU/
Communication unit
NT31/NT31C
SYSMAC
CS1 series PLC,
C series PLC,
CVM1/CV series
PLC, SRM1
9-pin connector or
Serial port B
25-pin
25-pin connector
(RS-422A, 25-pin type)
connector
RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500m)
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host (RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
Wiring When Connecting a C-series Host Link Unit or CPM1 (Host Link)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
PC side
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
SG
7
FG
hood
−
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RDB
−
RS-422A
connector
TRM
9
9
5
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
SDB (+)
−
−
SDB
RDA
FG
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
SDA
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring When Connecting CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1
Applicable units:
CPM1-10CDR-
j
CPM1-20CDR-
j
CPM1A-10CDj-
CPM1A-30CDj-
j
j
CPM1A-20CDj-
CPM1A-40CDj-
j
j
CPM2A-30CD
CPM2A-60CD
j
j
j-
j-
j
j
CPM2A-40CD
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
CPM2C-20
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
SRM1-C02-V2
Connect to the PC through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
NT31/NT31C side
1
14
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
PC side
CS
5
−
6
Abbreviation
FG
SG
SG
7
FG
−
8
SG
RS-422A
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
TRM
9
SDB (+)
SDA (−)
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
terminal
block
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SDB (+)
−
−
(9-pin type)
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
Shielding wire
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board, C series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, CQM1H Seri-
al Communications Board, or CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU61
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
interface
RD
3
RS
4
PC side
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
SG
7
FG
hood
−
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA
SDB
−
RS-422A
interface
TRM
9
9
5
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
RDA
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
RDB
−
13
25
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of
the NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring When Connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU
Applicable units:
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV
CVM1-CPU01-EV
j
j
j
CVM1-CPU21-EV
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EVj can-
not be connected by any connection method.
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
PC (CPU) side
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
SG
7
FG
hood
−
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA
SDB
−
RS-422A
connector
TRM
9
9
5
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SDB (+)
RS
CS
RDA
−
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
RDB
−
13
25
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
Host side
CS
5
−
6
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
SG
7
−
8
SDA
SDB
RS
RS-422A
connector
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SDB (+)
CS
−
ROA
ROB
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
Shielding wire
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT31/NT31C and a host
are connected is described here.
NT31/NT31C
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
Serial port B
(RS-485, 25-pin type)
9-pin connector
25-pin connector
RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Reference: When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT link (1:N) method (standard or
high-speed) can be used.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board and C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board, or
CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU61
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
RS
4
PC (CPU) side
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
SG
7
FG
hood
−
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SDA (−)
RS-422A
connector
TRM
9
SDB (+)
9
5
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
RDA (−)
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
RDB (+)
−
13
25
(9-pin type)
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
NT31/NT31C
CS1G/H
Serial port B
(RS-422A, 25-pin
type)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
9-pin connector
25-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-422A cables
(max. total length 500 m)
24V
DC
PRINTER PORT
B
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Reference: S Communication using the RS-422A type standard NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CQM1H.
S Communication using the RS-422A type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.
Connecting between
NT31/NT31C Units
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
:
1
1
14
14
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
Connector
FG
FG
hood
hood
−
−
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
SD
SD
RD
RD
3
3
RS
4
4
RS
CS
CS
5
5
−
6
6
−
SG
SG
7
7
−
8
8
−
:
TRM
TRM
9
9
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
−
−
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
13
25
−
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
(25-pin type)
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the
end of the RS-422A cable (marked : in the figure above) only.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, connect the functional ground of only one of
the NT31/NT31C units to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and a Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU61
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood
FG
−
1
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
interface
RD
3
RS
4
PC side
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
FG
SG
7
hood
−
8
SDA (−)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-422A
interface
TRM
9
SDB (+)
9
5
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
RDA (−)
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
RDB (+)
−
13
25
(9-pin type)
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
NT31/NT31C
CS1G/H
Serial port B
(RS-485, 25-pin type)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
9-pin connector
25-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-485 cables
(max. total length 500 m)
24V
DC
PRINTER PORT
B
Reference: S Communication using the RS-485 type standard NT link (1:N) method is pos-
sible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a
CS1 series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a
CQM1H.
S Communication using the RS-485 type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS1 series CS1G/H.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Connecting between NT31/NT31C Units
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
:
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
1
1
Abbreviation Pin number
Pin number Abbreviation
14
14
Shielding wire
Connector
Connector
hood
FG
FG
hood
−
−
1
2
1
2
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
SD
SD
RD
RD
3
3
RS
4
4
RS
CS
CS
5
5
−
6
6
−
SG
SG
7
7
−
8
8
−
:
TRM
TRM
9
9
RDB (+)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
13
25
13
25
−
−
−
−
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
23
24
25
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
(25-pin type)
(25-pin type)
Next PT
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the
end of the RS-485 cable (marked : in the figure above) only.
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-422A cable.
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and a Host
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS1-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU61
1
6
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood
−
1
2
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
SD
RD
3
4
RS
PC (CPU) side
CS
5
6
−
Pin number Abbreviation
Shielding wire
Connector
FG
7
SG
hood
8
SDA (−)
−
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-422A
connector
9
TRM
SDB (+)
9
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
−
−
−
−
RDA (−)
−
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
−
−
RDB (+)
−
13
25
(9-pin type)
−
−
23
24
25
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
−
(25-pin type)
Next PT
In order to avoid an FG ground loop, do not connect the functional ground of the
NT31/NT31C to the shielding of the RS-485A cable.
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the rec-
ommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the
CPU (CP) side. Some units come supplied with one connector and connector
hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Maker
Remarks
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
XM2A-2501
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
Connector
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
DB-25P F-N
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Name
Model
Maker
Remarks
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
XM2S-2511
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
Connector
hood
Delivered with the following
units:
25-pin type
DB-C2-J9
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
Cable
TKVVBS4P-03
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm )
Crimp
terminals
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
2
Molex Inc.
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specifica-
tion. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with
a tightening torque of 0.5 N@m.
Use the same specification of the terminal screws which is used in the relay ter-
minal block.
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
6.2 mm or less
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting
terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting termi-
nals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω. When
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at
the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s con-
nector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the
Cable, page 267.
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood
-
Terminal resistor setting
-
-
9
TRM
10
11
12
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
-
-
-
25
-
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Section 5-2
Pin Nos. 9 and 10
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PC, etc.) is OFF.
Reference: S The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.
+
10 (RDB)
−
16 (RDA)
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
9 (TRM)
S For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit, refer to setting
methods for each type of the communication.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Functions that are conve-
nient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here.
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
134
134
135
135
137
138
140
140
142
144
145
147
149
150
151
151
153
154
155
157
157
160
162
163
165
167
168
168
168
169
170
171
172
174
175
177
179
181
183
185
186
188
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1 I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-7 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-1 Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14-1 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
191
195
197
198
200
202
205
215
221
221
223
224
227
228
228
229
230
230
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Menu Operation Flow
Section 6-1
6-1 System Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NT31/NT31C for the first time or
changing the system program.
Create the Screen Data
Create the data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C by using the Support Tool.
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1
for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
Start Up the NT31/NT31C
(Display the System
Menu) (page 134)
Turn ON the power to the NT31/NT31C.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this
case, press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the Sys-
tem Menu.
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform
the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.
Initialize the Memory
(page 140)
If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT31/NT31C by operation from the
System Menu.
Transmit the Screen Data
(page 155)
Connect the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C and transmit the screen data from
the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C.
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 Connecting to the Sup-
port Tool (page 35).
Set the Memory Switches
(pages 157, 168, 188)
Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT31/NT31C — for exam-
ple the conditions for communication with the host — using the memory
switches.
Start Operation (page
168)
Connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.
System Maintenance
(page 191)
If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring to
this guide.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the NT31/NT31C
Section 6-2
6-2 Starting the NT31/NT31C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the
power to the NT31/NT31C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NT31/NT31C when it is started up.
6-2-1 Operation at Startup
The NT31/NT31C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or when
it is reset.
Initial Processing
Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the NT31/NT31C
and a system program check — and the internal processing required for startup,
are performed.
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be re-
installed. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 Operations in the
System Installer Mode (page 150).
Memory Unit Check and
Processing
Check if a memory unit is installed. If a memory unit is installed, processing
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance
with its DIP switch settings (pages 39 and 47).
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately
before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneous-
ly. If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of the system install-
er mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper system program.
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.
Start of Communication
with the Host
Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communication
method set in the system memory of the NT31/NT31C. During the interval until
communication is established, the system initialization screen (screen No.
9000) is displayed.
For details, refer to 6-8 Starting Operation (page 168).
If the system initialization screen remains on, display the System Menu by
pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check
the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host.
Operation Start
The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the
screen data in the NT31/NT31C.
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate
operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System
Menu, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 138).
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Section 6-3
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT31/NT31C operates in four modes: the RUN, Transmit, Maintenance,
and Expansion modes. These modes are selected from the System Menu.
In addition, the NT31/NT31C also features the System Installer mode which is
used specifically for installing the system program.
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the
NT31/NT31C power is switched ON.
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and
the System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System
Menu (page 138).
[RUN Mode]
[Transmit Mode]
This is the mode in which
the NT31/NT31C operates.
In this mode, screen
data and other data are
transmitted between the
Support Tool and the
NT31/NT31C.
In this mode the
NT31/NT31C can be
controlled from the host,
and various display and
I/O operations are
possible.
[Maintenance Mode]
To change system
settings or screen
data contents
When system
In this mode,
NT31/NT31C
maintenance operations,
such as initialization of
the memory, checking
settings, and the I/O
check, are executed.
settings and screen
data registration have
been completed
To change system
settings or screen
data contents.
SYSTEM MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Power ON
[Expansion Mode]
In this mode, the
If there is no system
program, or if the
settings for data
Programming Console
function is used, or check
the version of system
program.
control are changed...
[System Installer Mode]
In this mode, the system program of the
NT31/NT31C is installed, display of the
System Menu is enabled or disabled, and
screen data changes are enabled and
disabled, among other operations.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Section 6-3
Items in the System
Menu
The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Quit
Function
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode
screen.
Transmit Mode
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for
screen data between the Support Tool and the NT31/NT31C.
For details on transmission of screen data, refer to 6-6 Trans-
mitting the Screen Data (page 155).
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system mainte-
nance of the NT31/NT31C, and various NT31/NT31C settings.
Expansion Mode
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the
expansion functions supported by the NT31/NT31C. The fol-
lowing expansion functions are supported:
• Version Display
Displays the version of system program, the date it was
created, and the PT model. For details, refer to 6-14 Version
Display.
• Programming Console Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to be used as a Programming Console
for a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), or SRM1.
For details, refer to 6-12 Programming Console Function.
• Device Monitor Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to change the PC’s operating mode
and display/change the contents of words in a CS1G/CS1H,
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z), or SRM1. For details, refer to 6-13 Device Monitor
Function in this manual or 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the
Reference Manual.
Functions of the System
Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.
• Setting the display language
• Clearing and installing system programs
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
• Clearing screen data
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 Operations in the System Installer
Mode (page 150).
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Section 6-3
6-3-2 Menu Tree
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT31/NT31C to be
executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu tree,
starting from the System Menu, is shown below.
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the Sys-
tem Menu (page 138).
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the
NT31/NT31C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the
NT31/NT31C on shipment is shown below.
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE
Exit System Installer
Download System Program (page 151)
Change System Settings (page 153)
Erase Screen Data (page 154)
SYSTEM MENU
MEMORY
MEMORY INIT. MENU
SWITCH MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 155)
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Start-up Wait Time (page 169)
Key Press Sound (page 170)
Buzzer Sound (page 171)
Quit
Screen Data (page 140)
Display History (page 142)
Alarm History (page 144)
Recipe Table (page 145)
Memory Table (page 147)
Memory Switch (page 149)
Printer Controller (page 172)
Print Method (page 174)
MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU
Screen Saver Movement (page 175)
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 177)
Hist. Disp. Method (page 179)
Resume Function (page 181)
Comm. Auto-return (page 183)
Time-out Interval (page 185)
Retry Counts (page 186)
Quit
Memory Init.
Memory Switch
I/O Settings
Calendar Check (page 195)
PT Settings (page 197)
Display History
Alarm History
Comm. A Method (page 157)
Comm. B Select (page 167)
Comm. B Method (page 157)
Screen Data Disp. (page 202)
I/O Check
I/O SETTINGS MENU
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
Contrast Adjust (page 191)
Brightness Adjust (page 193)
Quit
I/F Check
Device Check
DISPLAY HISTORY MENU
EXPANSION
MODE MENU
Quit
I/F CHECK MENU
Sort by Occurrence (page 198)
Sort by Frequency (page 198)
Quit
Quit
Programming Console Function (page 221)
Version Display (page 230)
Device Monitor Function (page 227)
Tool Comm. (page 215)
Comm. Port A (page 217)
Comm. Port B (page 217)
Printer (page 220)
ALARM HISTORY MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 200)
Sort by Frequency (page 200)
DEVICE CHECK MENU
Quit
Buzzer Check (page 205)
LED Check (page 206)
LCD Check (page 208)
Backlight Check (page 209)
Screen Memory (page 209)
Touch Switch (page 212)
Battery (page 214)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Section 6-3
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System
Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu items.
Calling the System Menu
The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.
• Touching the corners of the touch panel
• Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu
Reference: S If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System
Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not apply if an
error has occurred).
S At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the
NT31/NT31C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.
Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.
RUN mode
POWER
[SYSTEM MENU]
RUN
Quit
Press any two of the four
corners at the same time.
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at
corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the
touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. In particu-
lar, when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of screen
switch over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To suc-
cessfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch switch is dis-
played, and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch
switch.
Reference: With the NT31/NT31C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen has
touch switches registered at all four corners.
Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu
There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu.
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a screen
when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch.
Calling the System
Installer Mode
If the NT31/NT31C has no system program installed, or if the system program is
destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established when the
power is switched ON.
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Section 6-3
NT31/NT31C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch
panel (size: 7.2 mm 7.2 mm).
Switch the power to the NT31/NT31C ON while pressing this touch switch.
POWER
RUN
Selecting Menu Items
The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT31/NT31C screen
as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them.
Example: Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing
Maintenance Mode in the System Menu.
Ver 3.10
Press Maintenance Mode.
Switching from the
System Menu to the RUN
Mode
Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus.
Reference: Unlike previous PT models, the NT31/NT31C does not return to the RUN mode
automatically if no operations are performed.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
6-4 Memory Initialization
The NT31/NT31C has the following initialization functions. Use them as neces-
sary.
• Clearing screen data
• Initializing memory tables
• Initializing memory switches
• Initializing display history record data
• Initializing alarm history record data
• Initializing recipe tables
Page 140
Page 147
Page 149
Page 142
Page 144
Page 145
Reference: If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C
cannot be started up correctly.
This operation clears (initializes) only the screen data and contents of the math-
ematical tables. The memory switch settings and display history/alarm history
record data are retained.
Reference: S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
S
T
h
e
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
a
n
b
e
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
S
y
s
t
e
m
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
r
m
o
d
e
t
o
o
(
p
a
g
e
1
5
1
)
.
S The following types of data can be initialized individually.
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 144)
Memory switch settings (page 147)
Display history record data (page 142)
Alarm history record data (page 144)
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clear-
ance, the message Erasing Now... is dis-
played.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without clearing the screen data.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the
MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the
screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen is dis-
played. These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute
has been set.
The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence (order of display
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
screen has been displayed).
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting of System in PT Configuration
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum
number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be periodically
initialized. If Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of
records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Display History.
Select Yes.
The display history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the display history record data.
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that
have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records the time
when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes ON), and the number of times that each bit
comes ON.
The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence (order of error
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
error has occurred).
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history re-
cord data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Screen (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings –
System Settings has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the
maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be
periodically initialized. If Screen (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maxi-
mum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest
data is recorded.
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Alarm History.
Select Yes.
The alarm history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the alarm history record data.
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables
You can initialize the recipe tables (i.e., all the recipe data) edited in the
NT31/NT31C. Here, “initializing” the recipe tables means to restore the battery
backup memory (“recipe data memory”) to the values in flash memory at that
time. If, after downloading from the Support Tool, you do not upload the data
even once, initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool.
The values will not be cleared.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Recipe Table.
Select Yes.
The recipe tables are initialized. During ini-
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-
played.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the recipe tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string
memory tables in the NT31/NT31C.
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the
Support Tool (they are not cleared).
When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values
regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 181).
If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the initial values set with
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initial-
ized.
Reference: S If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the memory tables can
be initialized just by switching the NT31/NT31C power off and back on again,
or by resetting the NT31/NT31C (page 181).
S The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and there-
fore cannot be initialized.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Table.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During ini-
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-
played.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the memory tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Initialization
Section 6-4
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT31/NT31C to their status
on shipment.
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Switch.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During ini-
tialization, the message Initializing is dis-
played.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the memory switches.
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message Finished is dis-
played and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section 6-5
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.
Memory Switch
Start-up Wait Time
Status
00
Key Press Sound
Buzzer Sound
ON
OFF
Printer Controller
Print Method
ESC/P
Tone (NT31C only)
Screen Saver Movement
Screen Saver Start up Time
Hist. Disp. Method
Resume Function
Comm. Auto-return
Time-out Interval
Retry Counts
Display erased
010
From New Data
OFF
OFF
01
005
*
Comm. A Method
Comm. B Select
Comm. B Method
Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)
RS-232C
None
* The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:
• Setting the display language (see below)
• Clearing/installing the system program (page 151)
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings)
(page 153)
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system
settings) (page 153)
• Clearing screen data (page 154)
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to Calling the System In-
staller Mode (page 138).
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section 6-5
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the dis-
play language is to be English or Japanese.
Select English or Japanese.
From here on, this manual assumes that
English has been selected here.
The System Installer mode menu is dis-
played.
If there is no system program or the system
program has been corrupted, the message
System Program not exist or incorrect. is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program
Use this function when the system program of the NT31/NT31C has been cor-
rupted, or when installing a new system program.
Reference: S In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be installed
at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool
(NT-ZJCAT1-EV4). When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer,
install the system installer also. For details on the method for installing the sys-
tem installer at the Support Tool side, and the operating procedure, refer to the
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
S When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible to use
the NT31/NT31C at all. Check that the system installer is installed at the Sup-
port Tool side before deleting the program. However, note that the registered
screen data and memory switch settings are retained.
S It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit auto-
matically by installing the memory unit at startup. (Refer to 3-5 Using a Memory
Unit (-Vj Versions).)
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Installer mode menu shown below.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section 6-5
Clearing the System Program
Select Download System Program.
Select Yes.
The system program is cleared. During
clearance, the message Erasing ... is dis-
played.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer
mode menu without clearing the system program.
• If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of system program clearance, the NT31/NT31C enters the
standby status for downloading of the system program.
Downloading the System
Program
On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for sys-
tem program downloading is automatically established.
When the NT31/NT31C enters this status,
transmit the system program from the sys-
tem installer at the personal computer.
During downloading, the progress of trans-
mission is indicated on the screen.
Select Run System.
If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.
When the system program is started, the NT31/NT31C starts up normally. If no
screen data has been registered, an error message will be displayed indicating
that screen data hasn’t been registered. Transfer the screen data and proceed.
Reference: If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a sys-
tem program, it is not possible to use the NT31/NT31C at all. After deleting the
system program, be sure to download a new one.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section 6-5
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings
The NT31/NT31C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the screen
data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by operating
errors.
Disabling/enabling System Menu Display
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot
be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches. Howev-
er, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error message
screen.
Disabling/enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is impossi-
ble to use the following System Menu functions.
• Switching to the Transmit mode
• Displaying the memory switch setting screens
• Checking the screen data memory
• Displaying the initialization menu
• Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display screen
can be displayed)
Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.
Select Change System Settings.
Select Display System Menu or Screen
Memory Protect.
Each time either of these items is selected,
the setting switches from Disabled to En-
abled or vice versa.
Select OK.
The settings are written to the NT31/NT31C
while the screen is displayed.
• If Cancel is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer mode
menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they were before
the operation was started.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section 6-5
• If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is
displayed.
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen is
redisplayed.
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C cannot be started
normally, use this function to clear the screen data.
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch set-
tings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference: S When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
S
T
h
e
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
a
n
a
l
s
o
b
e
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
f
r
o
m
t
h
e
S
y
s
t
e
m
M
e
n
u
(
p
a
g
e
1
4
0
)
.
S If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message Screen
Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode. If this hap-
pens, initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer
mode menu shown below.
Select Erase Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clear-
ance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT.
MENU screen without clearing the screen data.
• If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is dis-
played.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the Sys-
tem Installer mode menu screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmitting the Screen Data
Section 6-6
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NT31/NT31C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support
Tool, refer to the Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for
Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
Reference: S The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the
NT31/NT31C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit
(-Vj Versions) or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the Vj Suffix).
S The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud
Rate on the Comms. Setting... window of the Support Tool.
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System
Setting in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is not possible.
Screen Data Composition
and Transmission Units
The screen data comprises the following types of data.
• User screen data (screen units)
• System memory (memory switch) settings
• Direct connection information
• Numeral memory table data
• Character string memory table data
• Bit memory table data
• Mathematical table data
• Mark information
• Image/library data
• Recipe table data
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in file units, or to
transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units. (It is not
possible to transmit mathematical table data in data units.)
When data is transmitted in file units, all of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is
cleared and then the new data is transmitted.
When data is transmitted in data units, first the previous data is invalidated, then
the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not cleared,
free memory area in the NT31/NT31C will be insufficient when transmissions in
data units are repeated. If this happens, write the screen data again by data
transmission in file units.
Transmitting Screen Data
from the Support Tool
To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, follow the
procedure below.
Operation
1, 2, 3...
1. Connect the NT31/NT31C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool
has been installed and turn the power to the NT31/NT31C ON.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmitting the Screen Data
Section 6-6
3. Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below at the NT31/NT31C.
Ver 3.10
Select Transmit Mode.
Select Tool Transmit.
4. Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select
Download (NTST PT) in the Support Tool’s Connect menu and specify the
data to be transmitted.
5. During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.
6. On completion of screen data transmission, press the Quit touch switch.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the Transmit mode.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, use
the communication check functions of the NT31/NT31C to check if communica-
tion between the NT31/NT31C is normal or not (page 215).
Precautions to Be
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the
NT31/NT31C. If this happens, the NT31/NT31C may not enter the RUN mode
when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure to
display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be retrans-
mitted in file units to register it correctly.
Observed When
Transmitting Screen Data
• The power to the NT31/NT31C is interrupted or the NT31/NT31C is reset.
• The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is
interrupted or the computer is reset.
• The cable connecting the NT31/NT31C to the personal computer on which the
Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
• The Quit touch switch on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed to end screen
data transmission.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
• Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.
Note When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by
Using Memory Switches
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of com-
munication methods can be used to communicate with a host.
• Host link
S
M
e
m
o
r
y
l
i
n
k
m
e
t
h
o
d
• NT Link (1:1)
S Mitsubishi A-computer link method
S Mitsubishi FX method
• NT Link (1:N)
• High-speed NT Link (1:N)
The NT31/NT31C has the following two ports, either of which can be used for
communications with the host, depending on the requirements.
• Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)
• Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)
The method for setting the communication method for communications with the
host is described here.
For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader, refer
to 6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 188).
Reference: S Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code
reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A,
the host must be connected at serial port B. When serial port A is being used
for communications with the host, the host must be disconnected so that the
Support Tool can be connected.
S There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communica-
tions with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which 4/4 is dis-
played). For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the
conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9 System Settings
(page 168).
S When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method,
a system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to
the NT31/31C by the system installer (refer to page 151). For details, refer to
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j).
S When using PLCs manufactured by Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, or Siemens, re-
fer to NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-j).
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions
Items Set for
Communication
Conditions
The following settings are made for the communication conditions for commu-
nication between the NT31/NT31C and the host.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Port Communication Method/Communication Type Settings
Setting Item
Function
Setting Options
Page
Comm. A Method
Set the communication method used at serial
port A. Depending on the communication meth- model.
od, further communication condition settings
may be necessary.
A system program for OMRON
Page 160
Page 162
Page 163
Page 165
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or high-
speed)/Bar-Code Reader
Memory link
Comm. B Select
Comm. B Method
Set whether serial port B is to be used for
RS-232C or RS-422A communication.
RS-232C/RS-422A
Page 167
Set the communication method used at serial
port B. Depending on the communication meth- model.
od, further communication condition settings
may be necessary.
A system program for OMRON
Page 160
Page 162
Page 163
Page 165
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or high-
speed)
Memory link
Communication Condition Settings for The Host Link Method
Setting Item
Function
Setting Op-
tions
Page
Comm. Speed
(for host link only)
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host. 19200 bps
9600 bps/
Page
160
Communication Condition Settings for The NT link (1:1) Method
No further communication conditions need to be set.
Communication Conditions Settings for The NT Link (1:N) Method
Setting Item
Function
Setting Op-
tions
Page
Unit No.
(for NT link (1:N)
only)
Set the unit number of the
NT31/NT31C.
0 to 7
Page
163
Comm. Speed
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host. high-speed
Standard or
Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Meth-
od
Setting Item
Function
Setting Op-
tions
Page
Data bits
Set the data bits length.
Set the stop bits length.
Set the parity.
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
Page
165
Stop bits
Parity
None, even,
odd
Comm. Speed
Set the communications speed
for communications with the host. 4800, 9600,
1200, 2400,
19200, 38400
bps
Flow control
Response
Set the flow control and its meth- None, RS/CS,
od.
XON/XOFF
Set whether the response is car- Yes, No
ried out for normal process of
communication command or not.
Possible Combinations
of Communication
Method Settings
The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the
NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than these
listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer to the
PC Connection Manual (V042-E1-j) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-j).
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Serial port A
Serial port B
None
Host Link
NT Link
(1:1)
NT Link
(1:N)
Bar-code
reader
Memory
Link
None
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Host Link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N)
(Standard or
high-speed)
Memory Link
f
f
f
:
P
o
s
s
i
b
l
e
c
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
: Impossible combination
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.
Reference: When using serial port B for communication with the host, and serial port A for the
transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of serial port A
to None.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri-
al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (pre-
vious screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the host link method is to be set
(Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Host Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Comm. Speed touch switch to dis-
play the communications speed to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press Quit.
The communications speed is set.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu-
nications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:1) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:1) method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option NT Link (1:1).
The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed)
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:N) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
The communications speed determines whether the 1:N NT Link is standard or
high-speed.
Standard:
Standard 1:N NT Link
High-speed:
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:N) method (stan-
dard or high-speed) is to be set (Comm. A
Method or Comm. B Method) to display the
setting option NT Link (1:N).
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Unit No. touch switch to display
the unit number to be set. Press the Comm.
Speed touch switch to display the commu-
nications speed, standard or 115.2-kbps
high-speed. (The Comm. Speed setting de-
termines which method of 1:N NT Link is
used.)
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed. In this example, se-
rial port A is used for a standard 1:N NT Link.
Press Quit.
The unit number and communications
speed are set.
• To quit the unit number/communications speed setting screen without confirm-
ing the unit number/communications speed settings, press the Abort touch
switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the memory switch setting screen (4/4)
with the previous settings still in effect.
Reference: Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are con-
nected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs. The units num-
bers that can be set differ according to the host model, as follows.
S
C
2
0
0
H
E
(
-
Z
E
)
:
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)
S
C
2
0
0
H
G
(
-
Z
E
)
,
C
2
0
0
H
X
(
-
Z
E
)
:
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers
among PTs.
On completion of unit number/communications speed setting a, the
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri-
al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below. Check
the communication settings of the host to be used.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the memory link method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Memory Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)
by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch.
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)
by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch.
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)
by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch.
Display the communication speed to be set
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)
by pressing the Comm. Speed touch switch.
Display the condition of the flow control to be
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing
Flow Control touch switch.
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B set-
ting, RS/CS is not displayed.
Display presence or absence of the response
by pressing the Response touch switch.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Quit touch switch.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu-
nications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section 6-7
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B
Set the communication type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following
the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the Comm. B Select touch switch to
display the communication type to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Reference: f serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, RS-422A must be set as its
communication type.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-8 Starting Operation
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication
conditions, connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.
Note Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using
them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Switching to the RUN
Mode and Starting
Operation
Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The
NT31/NT31C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
Display of The System Initialization Screen
When establishing the communication with a host, the System initializing char-
acter string is displayed on the screen. If the communication with the host cannot
be established, the System initializing screen remains up. If this is the case,
check the settings at the host and the PT side, the cables and wiring.
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other
than the System initialization screen.
Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables
If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON, or if the initial values of the
memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/character-string memory
tables are copied to the allocated words at the host.
↓
Display of The Startup Screen
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen number of the
screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data registered
for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.
Confirming the
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are per-
formed normally.
Communications
between the NT31/NT31C
and the Host
• Confirm that the NT31/NT31C screens switch in accordance with the host pro-
gram.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the
host and the NT31/NT31C, and also check if the hardware settings are cor-
rect. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port, or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
• Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character
string input at the NT31/NT31C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the
contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Pro-
grammer).
If the results of operations at the NT31/NT31C are not sent to the host cor-
rectly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting dis-
play elements, refer to the description of each display element in the Refer-
ence Manual.
6-9 System Settings
The NT31/NT31C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during op-
eration to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory
switch settings relating to the operation environment.
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the bat-
tery in the NT31/NT31C, they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF.
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be dis-
played by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch switches.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Memory Switch Settings
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.
• Start-up Wait Time
• Key Press Sound
• Buzzer Sound
page 169
page 170
page 171
page 172
page 174
page 175
page 177
page 179
page 181
page 183
page 185
page 186
page 157
• Printer Controller
• Print Method
• Screen Saver Movement
• Screen Saver Start up Time
• Hist. Disp. Method
• Resume Function
• Comm. Auto-return
• Time-out Interval
• Retry Counts
• Comm. A Method
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 188.)
• Comm. B Select
page 167
page 157
• Comm. B Method
For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time
The Start-up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT31/NT31C switches to the
RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset. Set
this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing is displayed
during the Start-up Wait Time.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 00sec.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Start-up Wait Time to display the re-
quired time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the fol-
lowing sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch
on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed.
• ON: When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.
• OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.
The default (factory) setting is ON.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Key Press Sound to display ON or
OFF.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound
The NT31/NT31C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruc-
tion from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether or not the
buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.
• ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.
• OFF:
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur.
• ERROR ON:
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Reference: S There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this
memory switch setting has the highest priority.
S For details on the buzzer, refer to 2-15-5 Buzzer Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Buzzer Sound to display ON, OFF,
or ERROR ON.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.
Three types of printer can be connected to the NT31/NT31C: select the type
used with this memory switch setting.
• ESC/P:
Printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control
specifications or printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J82 (mono-
chrome) control specifications.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
• PC-PR201H:
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.
• PCL 5:
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.
Note that the NT31 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and
does not support color printing.
For the NT31, the Print Method is fixed as Tone.
The default (factory) setting is ESC/P.
Reference: S In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Print Method setting (page 174).
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Printer Controller to display the re-
quired printer type.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only)
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.
When using the NT31C, the currently displayed screen image or other data can
be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually printed out
in color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this memory switch
setting.
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as Tone.
• Color: Color images are printed in color.
• Tone: Color images are printed in monochrome tones.
The default (factory) setting is Tone.
Reference: S In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Printer Controller setting (page 172).
S For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Print Method to display the required
printing method.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement
The NT31/NT31C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by
turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of
time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random
colors (the colors only change for the NT31C).
The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character
strings are displayed while the screen display is off.
If Display is selected, the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 is displayed.
If Display erase is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the back-
light is also turned off while the screen display is off.
The default (factory) setting is Display erased.
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of the
following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference: S The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up
Time setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
(page 177).
S Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting, the
screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start
up Time.
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.
Press Screen Saver Movement to display
Display or Display erased.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
The NT31/NT31C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and
prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the
backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the
screen saver function operates.
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes.
If 000 is set, the screen saver function does not operate.
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any of
the following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference: S It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display
is off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement (page 175).
Note however that, when this feature is used, the backlight does not go off.
S For details on the screen saver function, refer to 2-15-4 Screen Saver Function
in the Reference Manual.
S Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Set a time in the input field to the right of
Screen Saver Start up Time.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method
The NT31/NT31C features the display history record function, which records the
time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times
they are displayed, and the alarm history record function, which continually
monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and
the number of times they come ON.
The Hist. Disp. Method setting determines whether — when these record data
are displayed in sort by occurrence — the records are displayed in a progression
from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
• From Old Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.
• From New Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.
The default (factory) setting is From New Data.
Reference: S When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the his-
tory record contents cannot be retained.
S For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record
function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function and 2-15-2 Alarm
History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Hist. Disp. Method to display the re-
quired display order.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function
The NT31/NT31C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables even
when the power to the NT31/NT31C is OFF and write back them to the host
when the power is turned ON.
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial
values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are not
initialized and are kept the battery-backed up contents.
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state that
is set by the Support Tool.
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the
previous contents of the memory table.
• ON:
The resume function is used.
• OFF: The resume function is not used.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference: S When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the
memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume
function.
S For details on the resume record function, refer to 2-15-3 Resume Function in
the Reference Manual.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Resume Function to display the re-
quired setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function
The NT31/NT31C has a function for ignoring communication errors and auto-
matically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.
The Comm. Auto-return setting determines whether the automatic reset func-
tion is effective or not.
• ON:
When a communication error occurs, the NT31/NT31C automatically returns
to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the System Initializing
screen may be displayed).
• OFF:
When a communication error occurs, an error screen is displayed and opera-
tion stops. Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT31/NT31C to the
RUN mode.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference: S If a communication error occurs when OFF is set for Comm. Auto-return, the
NT31/NT31C makes the number of attempts at communication with the host
specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch (page 186). If com-
munication cannot be re-established in any of these attempts, an error screen
is displayed.
S For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 239).
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. Auto-return to display the re-
quired setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval
The NT31/NT31C goes into the time-out error status if no response is received
from the host within a fixed time. The Time-out Interval setting specifies the time
lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.
The setting range is 1 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.
Reference: Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is deter-
mined by the setting for the Comm. Auto-return memory switch.
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Time-out Interval to display the re-
quired time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the fol-
lowing sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count
The NT31/NT31C does not immediately display an error screen when a commu-
nication error occurs, but tries to re-establish communication. The Retry Counts
setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communica-
tion. If communication cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the
following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm. Auto-return
memory switch (page 183).
• Comm. Auto-return ON:
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen.
Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts, attempts to re-establish
communication are repeated until normal communication is achieved.
• Comm. Auto-return OFF:
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately be-
fore is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communication.
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any
two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.
Reference: For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 239).
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Section 6-9
Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Set a number of times in the input field to the
right of Retry Counts.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Section 6-10
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
The NT31/NT31C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code
reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into char-
acter string input fields.
This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader
and the setting method for confirming the input data.
Reference: S For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a
bar code reader refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in
the Reference Manual.
S The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial port B
must be used for communications with the host.
Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers
Setting Item
Data bit length
Stop bit length
Parity bit
Function
Sets the bit length for the data bits.
Sets the stop bit length for the data.
Sets the parity bit for the data.
Setting Options
7* or 8 bits
Page
Page 189
Page 189
Page 189
1 or 2* bits
None, odd, even*
Communications Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader
speed
4800, 9600*, or 19200 Page 189
bps
Input method
Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a char-
acter string input field.
Manual*, Auto
Page 189
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The data
can be corrected and character strings can be added.
Auto:
The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.
* Default (factory) setting
Setting the
Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation
at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Communication
Conditions and Setting
Method
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Section 6-10
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the fourth memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. A Method to select Bar-Code
Reader.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of
Comm. A Method.
Display the required setting for each item by
pressing the touch switches.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press Quit.
Pressing Abort on the communication condition/confirmation method setting
screen causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the memory switch setting screen
(4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
On completion of communication condition/confirmation method setting, the
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Section 6-10
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
6-11 System Maintenance
The NT31/NT31C has the following maintenance and check functions.
Item
I/O Settings
Function
Page
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.
Display and setting of the time data of the NT31/NT31C clock function.
Page 191
Page 195
Calendar Check
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C and display of the
setting statuses of the serial ports.
PT Settings
Page 197
Display history record Display and printing of display history record data.
Page 198
Page 200
Page 202
Page 205
Page 215
Alarm history record
Screen data check
Display and printing of alarm history record data.
Display of each screen stored in the NT31/NT31C.
Device check Checking of the I/O functions of the NT31/NT31C.
I/O
check
I/F check
Checking of the communication functions of the NT31/NT31C.
This section describes how to use these functions.
6-11-1 I/O Settings
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the bright-
ness of the backlight.
With the NT31/31C, you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using
either of the following two methods.
Setting from the System Menu
Adjusting the contrast: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Contrast Adjust.
Adjusting the brightness: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Brightness Adjust.
Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation
You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the follow-
ing number, using a touch switch with a switch screen function, or by specifying
the display screen in the PT status control area.
Screen number 9030: Brightness and contrast adjustment screen.
Contrast Adjustment
The NT31/NT31C allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps. The CON-
TRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually
checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set, it remains
in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset (and even if
the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Setting from the System Menu
Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Contrast Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the left half of the screen.
[
[
[
[
]: Increase 10 steps
Y]:
B]:
Increase 1 step
Decrease 1 step
]: Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU
screen.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func-
tion, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the right half of the screen.
[
[
[
[
]: Increase 10 steps
Y]:
B]:
Increase 1 step
Decrease 1 step
]: Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set, and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the previous screen.
Backlight Brightness
Adjustment
The NT31/NT31C allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted in 3
steps. The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment
while actually checking the brightness on the screen. The length of hours the
backlight lasts in a normal temperature are as follows.
High contrast:
10000 hours
Low, middle contrast: 25000 hours
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Setting from the System Menu
Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Brightness Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the High, Middle, and
Low touch switches in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C re-
turns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func-
tion, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the brightness with the touch switches
(High, Middle, Low) in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The brightness is set, and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the previous screen.
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock
The NT31/NT31C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date and
time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation
from the System Menu.
Reference: S The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week set-
tings. When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and day of
the week. If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in the range 13
to 19 when entering the month — the buzzer sounds three times.
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
S Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function. Clock
data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT31/NT31C by using
these numeral memory tables.
S For details on the clock function, refer to 2-15-6 Clock Function in the Refer-
ence Manual.
S
N
o
c
l
o
c
k
d
a
t
a
i
s
s
e
t
o
n
s
h
i
p
m
e
n
t
f
r
o
m
t
h
e
f
a
c
t
o
r
y
.
S The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT31/NT31C. If the
battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained when the pow-
er to the NT31/NT31C is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset and the clock
function will not operate correctly.
S When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for
System Setting in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set the date
and time.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Calendar Check.
Press Set.
If you are just checking the display, press
Quit at this point; the NT31/NT31C will return
to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU
screen.
Set the date.
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,
hour, minute, and second settings, and the
day of the week setting, are touch switches:
press these touch switches to change the cor-
responding settings.
Press Quit.
The clock data is set and the NT31/NT31C re-
turns to the date and time display.
• Pressing Abort causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the date and time display
without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status
The direct connection settings of the NT31/NT31C screen data, and the settings
for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.
Screen Configuration and Display Contents
There are the following three PT setting status screens.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Display Contents of The First Screen
Item
Meaning
Screen Data Type
PT Control Area
The host type set for the screen data
Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allo-
cated
PT Notification Area Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allo-
cated
Window Control
Area
Word at the host to which the window control area is allo-
cated
Numeric Expression Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of
host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated
(numeric value storage method).
Expansion I/F
Compatibility
Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector
Sets whether or not to use NT30/620 compatible mode for
screen data. (Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31/631
or emulate many key NT30/620 characteristics.)
Display Contents of The Second Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port A
Comm. Method
Comm. Setting
Communication type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)
Communication method set for serial port A
Communication conditions set for serial port A (display con-
tents differ according to the communication method)
Display Contents of The Third Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port B
Communication type set for serial port B
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
Comm. Method
Comm. Setting
Communication method set for serial port B
Communication settings set for serial port B (display con-
tents differ according to the communication method)
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Display Method
Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select PT Settings.
Switch the screen as required by pressing the
[↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous screen)
touch switch.
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTE-
NANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record
The display history record function is a function that records the order of display
of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is dis-
played. Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been
set in advance are processed by this function.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (display time order)
and sort by frequency (order of number of times displayed).
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Reference: S With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by calling screen
No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency) during
the RUN mode.
S For details on the display history record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display Histo-
ry Record Function in the Reference Manual.
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 179).
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 172) and Print Method (page 174) memory switches.
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Display History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre-
quency.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a
display for the sort by occurrence method
(from oldest record).
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
If required, press Prt. to print the display his-
tory record data.
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the DISPLAY
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis-
played screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence, from oldest record
No. Scrn YY/MM/DD HH:MM Comment
01/01
1
2
3
4
1
2
98/01/12
98/01/12
98/01/13
98/01/13
10:21 Coolant Error
11:53 Motor Error
8
09:35 Compressor Error
14:22 Emergency Stop
2000
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record
The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors, during
operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory
table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times
they come ON.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (ON time order) and
sort by frequency (order of number of times the bits have come ON).
Reference: S With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by registering an
alarm history display element on the screen.
S For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 2-15-2 Alarm History
Record Function in the Reference Manual.
S The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 179).
S The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 172) and Print Method (page 174) memory switches.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Alarm History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre-
quency.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a dis-
play for the sort by occurrence method (from
oldest record).
If required, press Prt. to print the display his-
tory record data.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the ALARM
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis-
played screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence method, from oldest record
No. Comment
YY/MM/DD HH:MM 01/01
1
2
3
Remote I/O Error
98/02/06
98/02/07
98/02/17
16:02
09:21
15:44
PIC Unit Error
Cycle Time Over
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data
The NT31/NT31C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed
and checked by operation from the System Menu.
Reference: S Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu.
S Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system
use cannot be displayed.
Specifying The Display Method
Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.
Setting
Setting Item
Function
Options
Display of Lamp/
Touch SW No.
Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch
switch is displayed or not.
ON, OFF*
The display format is as follows L
j
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
(
j
:
a
r
e
a
t
y
p
e
,
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
:
b
i
t
number).
Display of Memory Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string
ON, OFF*
Table No.
memory tables are displayed or not.
The display format for numeral memory tables is N
f
f
f
f
a
n
d
t
h
e
d
i
s
p
l
a
y
f
o
r
m
a
t
f
o
r
character string memory tables is S
f
f
f
f
.
This function is valid for the following display elements.
- Numeral displays
- Character string displays
- Bar graphs
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)
- Character string input fields
Display of image/
Library No.
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.
ON, OFF*
Display of Broken Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the dis- ON, OFF*
Line Frame play elements for showing the positions registered.
* Default (factory) setting
Reference: Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting from
this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the settings are
set to OFF).
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen
The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen.
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multi-
ple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
c)
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
a) Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (ex-
cluding fixed display elements).
b) Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen
in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding
fixed display elements).
c) Return to the screen on which screens are specified.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Displaying the SCREEN
DATA CHECK Screen
Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Screen Data Disp.
Specify the screen to be displayed in the input
field in the middle of the screen.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
Press Set.
Press the touch switches to specify the dis-
play method in each case.
The setting option changes each time a touch
switch is pressed.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Press Quit to return to the screen number
selection screen.
Press Disp.
Touching the top or bottom of the screen
changes the way the display elements over-
lap each other in the order in which they are
registered.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
T 016312
ERROR
L 020000
L 020005
L 020013
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
Error
Occurrence
In this example, the bottom portion of the
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be
displayed over the lamp.
When you have finished checking the screen,
press the central part of the screen to return
to the screen number selection screen.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
T 015301
STOP
T 016312
ERROR
RUN
L 020000
L 020005
L 020013
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
Error
Occurrence
If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation, start-
ing by specifying the screen number.
To end the operation, press Quit on the screen number selection screen. The
NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-7 Device Check
The NT31/NT31C provides checks on the functions of the following items.
• Buzzer
• LED
• LCD
• Backlight
• Screen data memory
• Touch switches
• Battery voltage
Page 205
Page 206
Page 208
Page 209
Page 209
Page 212
Page 214
Checking the Buzzer
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Reference: The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzz-
er Sound memory switch.
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Buzzer Check.
• If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the
Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
• To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the Buzzer Check touch switch
again.
Checking the RUN LED
Check if the RUN LED functions normally.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LED Check.
• If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this time the
LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
Lit in green OFF lit in red OFF lit in green...
• To end the LED check, press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE
CHECK MENU screen again.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking the LCD
(Screen Display)
Check if the LCD (screen display) functions normally by following the menu op-
eration from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LCD Check.
• The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on
the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared.
With the NT31C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is
repeated for each color in turn (red green blue magenta cyan yellow white
black).
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT31/NT31C re-
turns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
• To abort the LCD check, press the top right corner of the touch panel. The
NT31/NT31C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking the Backlight
Check if the backlight functions normally by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Backlight Check.
• If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the Backlight Check touch
switch is displayed in reverse video.
• To end the backlight check, press the Backlight Check touch switch again.
Screen Data Memory
Check
Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.
Reference: S In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen data
memory. Since all the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is lost in this check,
confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before
executing it.
S If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Set-
tings in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a screen data
check.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
S
O
n
c
e
a
s
c
r
e
e
n
d
a
t
a
c
h
e
c
k
h
a
s
b
e
e
n
s
t
a
r
t
e
d
,
i
t
c
a
n
n
o
t
b
e
s
t
o
p
p
e
d
.
Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the Sys-
tem Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Screen Memory.
Press Execute.
• During the check, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
• On normal completion of the check, the message Memory Check OK is dis-
played.
• If an error is discovered in the check, the message Memory Check NG is dis-
played.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking Touch
Switches
Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Touch Switch.
Press the touch switches displayed on the
screen. A touch switch is normal if it is dis-
played in reverse video while pressed.
To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT31: displayed
in reverse video; NT31C: displayed in yellow). The NT31/NT31C will return to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Reference: S The functions of touch switches pressed during the I/O check are not notified
to the host.
S The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is
displayed in reverse video (for NT31) or displayed in yellow (NT31C). Start the
check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking the Battery
Voltage
Check the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Battery.
The voltage is within the normal range. or
The voltage is lowered. is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed, replace the built-in battery immedi-
ately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 7-3-1 Replacing the Bat-
tery (page 244).
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces
The NT31/NT31C allows the following communication functions to be checked.
• Communication with the Support Tool Page 215
• Communication at serial ports
• Communication with printers
Page 217
Page 220
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking
Communication with the
Support Tool
Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Tool Comm..
The check on communication with the Sup-
port Tool starts.
• If communication with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the
Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the
NT31/NT31C.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
After confirming the result of the test, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
I/F CHECK MENU screen.
Checking
Communication at Serial
Ports
Check communication at the serial ports (A, B).
Check Screen
The check screen and check method differ according to the communication
method set for the port to be checked.
For Host Link
Example: Serial port A while using the host link
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data in hexadecimal.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and set-
tings.
For NT Link (1:1 or 1:N)
Example: Serial port B while using the NT Link (1:N)
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as ∗∗ symbols at Sending Data.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data as ∗∗ symbols.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and set-
tings.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
For Memory Link
Example: Serial port A while using the memory link
The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the com-
mand from the host.
• If communication with the host is normal, the data received from the host is dis-
played in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the
host, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and set-
tings.
For a Bar Code Reader
The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar
code reader in this status.
• If communication with the bar code reader is normal, the read character strings
are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code
reader, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and
settings.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Check Method
Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Comm. Port A or Comm. Port B.
The check screen is displayed (Check
screen, page 217).
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking
Communication with a
Printer
Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Printer.
Confirm that a printer is connected to the
NT31/NT31C, then press Execute: Printer
Interface Check will be printed out at the
printer.
• While data is being sent to the printer, the message Checking Now... is dis-
played.
• When the sending of data to the printer is completed, Finished Normal by Print-
er Interface Check is displayed.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
• If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts, the
message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
6-12 Programming Console Function
The NT31/NT31C features has been equipped with the Programming Console
function, which allows it to be used like a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Con-
sole for CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E,
CS1-series CS1G/CS1H, or SRM1 PCs.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be
executed.
Note When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that the
system is safe before carrying out the following operations.
• Changing monitor data
• Switching the operating mode
• Forced set or reset
• Changing a present value or set value
6-12-1 Usable Systems
The Programming Console function can communicate with the PC with the com-
munication methods indicated in the following table.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Commu-
nication
Method
Commu-
nication
Type
Applicable PCs
Connected Port
(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
CPM2A-30CD
CPM2A-40CD
CPM2A-60CD
j
j
j
j -
j -
j -
j
j
j
CPU built-in RS-232C
port
(*2)
(*2)
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
-
j
j
NT Link
(1:1)
CPM2C-20
j
j
(*1)
j
-
CQM1-CPU4j -EV1
(*1)
CQM1H-CPU21
(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51
(*1)
CQM1H-CPU61
RS-232C
SRM1-C02-V2
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
j
j
CPM1A-10CDj -
CPM1A-20CDj -
CPM1A-30CDj -
CPM1A-40CDj -
j
j
j
j
(*3)
Peripheral port
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
S CPU built-in
RS-232C port
NT Link
(1:N)
(*4)
S
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
p
o
r
t
*1: The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority. If a Programming
Console is connected later, the Programming Console function of the
NT31/NT31C is invalidated and operation from the NT31/NT31C becomes
impossible.
*2: The CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PC’s Communication Port into a
RS-232C port and a peripheral port.
*3: An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C
adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is required.
*4: The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An
RS-232C converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.
Reference: Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,
and C200HX/HG/HE PCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1:
j
j
j5,
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
j3, j4, j5, j*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE: j5 j*6
j
j
*
6
CQM1:
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
6-12-2 Connection Method
CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), or
SRM1
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Refer to
Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connect-
ing to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H, turn ON pin 7 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H’s CPU Unit.
CPM1 or CPM2A
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). With a CPM1, con-
nect the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CPM2C
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s
communications connector with a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Con-
necting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A
Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C, turn ON pin 2 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C’s CPU Unit.
CS1G/CS1H
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:N) (standard or
high-speed). Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on
connecting to the PC. The standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link can be used.
The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT’s unit num-
ber is set to 0. Only one unit using the Programming Console function can be
connected to each of the PC’s ports (built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port).
With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used simulta-
neously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port. Furthermore, the
Programming Console function can be started at the RS-232C port while a Pro-
gramming Console is connected to the peripheral port.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
6-12-3 Method of Use
The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu
as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Programming Console.
The Programming Console screen is dis-
played.
Press the Programming Console sheet keys
(touch switches) for the operation.
Press the Quit touch switch to exit the
screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong communica-
tion protocol is selected or a Programming
Console is connected to the peripheral
(*1)
port.
*1: With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can be used
simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, the system menu can be displayed by press-
ing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. The Check touch
switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu, but it will not
work unless the cause of the error has been removed. If the system menu is not
displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed, press two of the four corners
of the touch panel to return to the system menu.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Key Operations
Mode Selection Keys, Mode Lock Key
The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below com-
prises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PC,
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.
Mode selection keys
Mode lock key
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch
switches and pressing them causes the PC operation mode to change (unlike an
actual Programming Console, it is possible to switch directly between the RUN
mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
When the Programming Console function is started, the PC operation status is
read and reflected at the PC.
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between the
lock ON (with no key displayed) and lock OFF (with key displayed) states when
pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are ineffec-
tive. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock
ON status and during the lock OFF status.
When the Programming Console function starts, the lock ON status is estab-
lished.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
During Lock OFF
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
During Lock ON
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
Programming Console Keyboard
The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Program-
ming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by
the dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a key
operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size
of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to press as
close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console
key sheet for the CS1 series is automatically displayed.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Standard Programming Console Key Sheet
Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles
• Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to
store or read a program, use a Programming Device.
• It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or not
the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press
Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C. It sounds when the setting is ON
and does not when the setting is OFF (page 170).
• If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function, an error
screen is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is deter-
mined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C
(page 171).
Reference: A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console function
to change the communications settings (in the PC’s PC Setup) that govern the
port to which the NT31/NT31C is connected. In this case, the Programming Con-
sole function will be unusable.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Device Monitor Function
Section 6-13
6-13 Device Monitor Function
The NT31/NT31C has been equipped with the Device Monitor function which
can be used to change the PC’s operating mode, read/change words in the PC’s
data areas, and display the PC’s error log of a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1.
The Device Monitor can perform the following operations:
• Changing the PC’s operating mode
• Displaying/changing the contents of words, displaying/changing the status of
bits, force-setting/force-resetting the status of bits (Registration Monitor)
• Listing the contents of a range of words (Continuous Monitor)
• Displaying the error log and clearing errors (Error Log)
This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains
how to connect to the PC. For more details, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Func-
tion in the Reference Manual.
Caution Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to per-
form one of the following operations from the PT.
Changing monitored data
!
Switching the PC’s operating mode
Force setting or force resetting bits
Changing PVs or SVs
Reference: S The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver. 3.0 and higher versions of
the PT system program only.
S The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data
Access Console (DAC).
S The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link com-
munications.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Device Monitor Function
Section 6-13
6-13-1 Compatible Systems
The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and
PCs that can support the PT’s Device Monitor function.
Communications
method
PC model
*1
*1
1:1 NT Link
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
j
j
*1
*1
*1
*1
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
CPM1A-10CDj -
CPM1A-20CDj -
CPM1A-30CDj -
CPM1A-40CDj -
j
j
j
j
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CPM2A-30CD
CPM2A-40CD
CPM2A-60CD
j
j
j
j -
j -
j -
j
j
j
*2
*2
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -
j -
j
j
CPM2C-20
j
j
j
CQM1-CPU4j -EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
1:N NT Link
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
*1: A CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter is required.
*2: Use a Conversion Cable (CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118), CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect to the PC.
6-13-2 Connection Method
CQM1H or
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
The 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly
the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PC.
CQM1 or C200HS
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly the same as for
the 1:1 NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details
on connecting to the PC.
CPM1, CPM2A, or SRM1
The 1:1 NT Link can be used in all CPUs and the 1:N NT Link can also be used in
-V2 and higher versions of the SRM1. The connection method is exactly the
same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C
cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter or
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CPM2C
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is the same as for the NT
Link (1:1). Connect to the PC’s communications connector with a CPM2C-
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Device Monitor Function
Section 6-13
CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
CS1G/CS1H
The 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed) can be used. The connection method
is exactly the same as for the 1:N NT Link.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PC.
6-13-3 Method of Use
The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de-
scribed below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Device Monitor.
An error message will be displayed
if the wrong communications proto-
col is selected.
The Device Monitor screen is displayed.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, press the Check touch switch on the screen
to return to the system menu. In addition, pressing two of the four corners of the
touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system
menu.
For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function, refer to 2-16 De-
vice Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Version Display
Section 6-14
6-14 Version Display
Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT31/NT31C’s sys-
tem program. The Version Display screen shows the model, creation date, and
version of the system program installed in the NT31/31C.
6-14-1 Method of Use
The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de-
scribed below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Version Display.
The system program’s version information will be
displayed as described below. Press the Quit
touch switch to exit the Version Display screen
and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
• PT Model:
PT model number
• System program: System program name
• Version
System program version
• Date
Date program was created.
This screen is an example. Actual screens will
show the information specific to the PT and sys-
tem program being used.
After checking the version information, press the Quit touch switch to exit the
Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
Reference: S The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT.
The B suffix will not be displayed, even for black models.
S The system program’s version number is also displayed in the upper-right cor-
ner of the System Menu.
S The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program
installed with the System Installer.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to
prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
235
235
237
238
239
239
241
244
245
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
7-1 Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT31/NT31C occurs, find the symp-
toms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy in-
dicated in the table.
Note 1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
Power LED fails to come
ON
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 Power Supply Connection,
page 33)
Power supply fuse has blown.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Nothing is displayed on
the screen.
Screen No. 0 has been read at the
host side.
This is not an error. Change the screen number
from screen number 0. (Setting the screen number
to 0 turns the screen off.)
The system startup waiting time has This is not an error. The display will appear after the
not elapsed yet.
waiting time has elapsed.
Cannot communicate with The Transmit mode has not been
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit
mode. (6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data, page 155)
the Support Tool
established.
Not connected to the Support Tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool, page 35)
The PT model setting and direct
connection setting at the Support
Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection
Tool do not match the NT31/NT31C. settings that match the NT31/NT31C.
Cannot communicate with Memory switch settings do not
Check the communication setting in the Memory
Switch menu of the Maintenance mode, and match
the communication protocol settings for the host and
NT31/NT31C. (6-7 Setting Conditions for
Communications with Host by Using Memory
Switches, page 157)
the host
match.
Cannot switch from the
system initializing screen.
Communication error
message is displayed
when communicating to
the host.
NT31/NT31C and host are not
correctly connected.
Check that the type, length, and installation of the
connector cable match the specifications. (Section 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and
Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port)
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the
terminator setting is incorrect.
Make the NT31/NT31C and PC termination
resistance settings correctly. (Section 4 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port)
In an NT Link (1:N) connection, there Make the settings again so that there is no
is duplication in the unit numbers.
duplication. (6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method
(Standard/High-speed), page 163)
The power to the NT31/NT31C,
NT-AL001 or host is OFF.
Check the power supply.
The buzzer has sounded
and the RUN LED is OFF.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
The NT31/NT31 has developed
trouble.
Contact your OMRON service center.
The touch panel does not Malfunction due to external noise
respond.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
The touch panel is broken.
Test the touch panel with I/O Check in the
MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error,
contact your OMRON service center.
The PC mode has
changed to the monitor
mode.
The NT31/NT31C changes the mode This is an NT31/NT31C specification. When using a
when host link communication is
used.
PC that can also be connected using the NT Link
method, use an NT Link connection (there is no
mode change with the NT Link method).
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The graph display does
not change.
One of the percentage display
settings — −100%, 0%, or 100% —
is incorrect.
Set the −100%, 0%, and 100% values in the
following relationship:
−100% value < 0% value < 100% value
The trend graph display
does not agree with the
actual time axis.
The cycle for graph display update
processing is longer than the set
sampling cycle.
Delete other elements on the same screen as the
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have
a high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling
cycle.
The Programming
Console function cannot
be used.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method as follows when
using the Programming Console function.
S With C-series PLC: 1:1 NT Link
S With CS1-series PLC:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console and
the Programming Console function at the same
time. Disconnect the Programming Console.
The PC does not support the
Programming Console function.
Not all PCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of PC you are using.
(6-12 Programming Console Function, page 221)
The system program for other
vendor’s PCs has been installed.
(PC models other than OMRON.)
The Programming Console function can be used
only when the system program for OMRON PCs is
installed. Install the correct system program.
The Device Monitor
function cannot be used.
The communications settings are not Set the communication method as follows when
correct.
using the Device Monitor function.
S
W
i
t
h
C
-
s
e
r
i
e
s
P
L
C
s
:
1
:
1
N
T
L
i
n
k
o
r
1
:
N
N
T
L
i
n
k
S With CS1-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The PC does not support the Device Not all PCs support the Device Monitor function.
Monitor function.
Check the model of PC you are using. Refer to 6-13
Device Monitor Function for details.
The system program installed in the
PT is for a PC maker other than
OMRON.
The Device Monitor function can be used only when
the PT is connected to a PT with the system
program for OMRON PCs installed. Install a system
program that supports the Device Monitor function.
The memory table display Since the memory table is allocated
When the contents of the memory table are set as a
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the
host.
contents differ from the
initial value set at the
Support Tool.
to the host memory, the display is
updated in accordance with the
contents of the host memory.
The battery voltage has dropped and Replace the battery and execute memory table
the data in the memory table has
been destroyed.
initialization. (7-3-1 Replacing the Battery, page 244,
and 6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables, page 147)
Since ON is set for the resume
function, the initial values of the
screen data memory are not written
to the memory tables.
Execute memory table initialization. (6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Tables, page 147)
If the resume function does not need to be used,
use the NT31/NT31C with the resume function OFF.
(6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function, page 181)
The numeral memory table is
specified as the destination for a
mathematical table’s results.
Calculations are executed continuously while the PT
is operating and the calculation results are
automatically written to the memory table. Specify
another numeral memory table or a word in the
host.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
Updating of numeric
values and text is
delayed.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
There are too many numeral/text
displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
In an RS-422A/485 connection,
there is illegal branching or an
erroneous terminator setting.
Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Some of the elements
arranged on a normal
screen are not displayed.
The quantity of read data exceeds
the stipulated restriction.
Check the maximum number of elements by
referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the
Reference Manual. Create the screen data again
and then transmit all of the screen data in a batch to
the NT31/NT31C.
The total of the element coefficients
for the displayed screen is greater
than 1024.
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from
Check the maximum number of elements by
some of the set elements the host in screen units, the number referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the
are not displayed.
of elements on the overlapping
screen has exceeded the maximum
permissible without being checked
by the Support Tool.
Reference Manual. Create the screen data again
and then send all the screen data in a batch to the
NT31/NT31C.
The System Menu cannot Display System Menu under Change In the System Installer mode, set Display System
be called up.
System Settings in the System
Installer mode is set to Disabled.
Menu to Enabled (page 153).
The following System
Menu operations are not
possible.
Screen Memory Protect under
Change System Setting in the
System Installer mode is set to
Disabled.
In the System Installer mode, set Screen Memory
Protect to Enabled (page 153).
- Establishing the
Transmit mode
- Displaying the memory
switch setting screens
Screen Memory Protect has been
set to Disabled because the PT
power supply was turned OFF during In the System Installer mode, first change the
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of
screen data.
- Screen data memory
check
deletion of screen data.
setting for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled, then
repeat the screen data delete operation (pages 153
and 154)
- Displaying the
initialization menu
- Displaying the
calendar/time setting
screen
Cannot input numeric
values
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check for numeric value input is in
effect.
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.)
limit check setting for numeric value input, and
correct it if necessary. Refer to 2-12 Inputting
Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details.
Cannot input numeric
values/character strings.
Bit 5 of the PT status control area
(numeral/character string input) is
set to 1 (ON).
Set bit 5 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
The interlock function is set for the
input field and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
Window screen does not
open
Bit 6 of the PT status control area
(PT window opening) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 6 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Cannot switch screens
with touch switches
Bit 4 of the PT status control area
(PT screen switching) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 4 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Touch switch does not
work. (Buzzer sounds.)
The interlock function is set for the
touch switch and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Touch switches are disabled when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The display is dim.
Insufficient contrast or brightness
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 191 and
193).
Backlight defective, or its life has
expired
Replace the backlight (page 242).
The display is too faint.
The contrast is too high.
Reduce the contrast (page 191).
The digits in numeral
display come out as *.
The number of digits of a numeric
value in a numeral memory table
exceeds the set number.
• Confirm the values of the PC words allocated to the
numeral memory table.
• Allocate one PC word to each numeral memory
table.
”**” or ”***” is displayed
in the numeral display or
numeral input field.
The numeric value in the numeral
memory table exceeds the number
of display digits.
• Check the values of the PC words allocated to the
numeral memory table entry.
• Allocate only one word to each numeral memory
table entry if the numeral display or numeral input
field has 4 digits or less.
7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT31/NT31C displays an error message, find the corresponding
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy
indicated in the table.
For details of the error messages displayed when using memory unit and correc-
tive action to take for them, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C with
Vj) in page 39 or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C without Vj) in page
47.
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the
NT31/NT31C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.
Message
[No Comm. Protocol]
Cause
Remedy
No communication protocol has
been set.
Using the memory switches, set the
communication method to be used for
communication with the host. (6-7 Setting
Conditions for Communications with Host
by Using Memory Switches, page 157)
Set the comm. Protocol by
MAINTENANCE MODE.
Communication protocol and
screen data type are mismatched
[Screen Data Error]
- The power was switched OFF
during screen data
initialization, checking, or
transmission.
Initialize the screen data memory by
operation at the System Menu, then
re-transmit the screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 140)
Screen Data corrupted.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
- Transmission of screen data
was interrupted.
If the problem persists, contact your
OMRON service center.
- Illegal data has been written to
the screen data memory.
[No Screen Data]
No screen data is registered.
Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.
No Screen Data is saved in Screen
Memory.
Download Screen Data using by the
Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE, and download Screen Data
again.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
Message
Cause
Allocated words have not been
set for the PT status control area area and PT status notify area with the
Remedy
[No Direct Connection Info.]
Allocate words for the PT status control
No Direct Connection Information is set
in Screen Data.
and PT status notify area.
Support Tool and then transmit the direct
connection information to the
NT31/NT31C.
Set Direct Connecting Information in
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
[Incorrect Screen Data]
The type of registered screen
data does not match that at the
NT31/NT31C.
Initialize the screen data memory, then
transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 140)
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not
match with the System Program.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
[No Starting Screen]
No data is registered for either
the screen number set in the PT
status control area or the Initial
Screen set with the Support Tool. Screen in the System settings under PT
Or the screen number which
does not exist are registered.
Either specify a screen number for which
data is registered at the PT status control
area, or set the screen as the Initial
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.
Fix Screen Data using by the Support
Tool.
Configuration at the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
[Touch Panel is disconnected]
The touch panel cable (film
cable) inside the NT31/NT31C is
disconnected.
Contact your OMRON service center.
[Memory Switch Corrupted]
The memory switches have been Set the memory switches again using the
initialized due to discovery of an
error in the memory switch
settings.
System Menu and the System settings
under PT Configuration at the Support
Tool. (Section 6 System Menu Operation)
Because Memory Switch setting was
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.
If the problem recurs, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
There is an error in the date/time Check the battery voltage by checking
values due, for example, to low
battery voltage.
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 214, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Battery, page 244)
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and
set Calendar Data.
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be
normal, set the calendar clock correctly
from the System Menu. (6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and
Clock, page 195)
[Backup Data Error]
Initialization has been executed
because of an error in the
backup data area.
Check the battery voltage by checking
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 214, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Memory table and History data was
initialized by backup failure.
It can be caused by lowered voltage of
the battery.
Battery, page 244) The re-transmit the
memory table data from the Support Tool.
If the voltage is normal and the problem
recurs, contact your OMRON service
center.
[With memory switch setting screen]
Invalid Comm. Method
Protocol settings for serial port A Refer to Possible Combinations of
and serial port B are
mismatched.
Communication Method Settings in page
158 and set the protocol of serial port A
and serial port B so that their settings are
matched.
* Set serial port A to None when
connecting the Support Tool and the host
at the same time.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the
NT31/NT31C and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Address Setting Error]
The host side allocated words
and bits set with the Support Tool area used at the host side by referring to PC
are incorrect.
Set correct words and bits after checking the
Addressing Error exists in the
Screen.
Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference
Manual or the operation manual for the PC
being used.
Correct address setting by the
Support Tool.
[Memory Table No. Error]
The memory table number set
with the Support Tool is outside
the range for the number of
memory tables set in the system number again within the established range.
memory.
Either increase the number of memory tables in
the System settings under PT Configuration at
the Support Tool, or set the memory table
Memory table No. is out of limit.
Correct the table No. by the
Support Tool.
[Programming Console Error]
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method/communication
port as follows when using the Programming
Console function.
Setting of Programming Console
Function is inadequate. It can be
caused by:
S
W
i
t
h
C
-
s
e
r
i
e
s
P
L
C
s
:
1
:
1
N
T
L
i
n
k
S This PLC does not support Pro-
gramming Console Function.
S With CS1-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
S Protocol mismatch. Set the PLC
to NT Link.
The PC used does not support
the Programming Console
function.
Not all PCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of the PC you are
using. (6-12 Programming Console Function,
page 221)
S “PROGRAMMING CONSOLE”
is connected to PLC.
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
[Programming Consol Error]
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
Programming Console Function
does not RUN. It can be caused
by:
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
S
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
i
s
f
a
u
l
t
y
.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
34.
S
“
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
I
N
G
C
O
N
S
O
L
E
”
is connected to PLC.
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
S Protocol mismatch between the
PT and PLC. Set the PLC to NT
Link.
The communication conditions at Set the communication conditions at the PC to
the PC have been changed in
accordance with the
match the conditions set in the System Menu.
NT31/NT31C Programming
Console function.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT31/NT31C data is
initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Flash Memory Error]
There is a hardware fault, or the
flash memory (memory for
storing screen data) has reached data several times, contact your OMRON
If the same message is displayed even after
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen
Flash Memory I/O Error.
If this happens frequently, Flash
Memory may be broken.
the end of its service life.
service center.
Press Reset Switch to restart.
[Calendar Data Error]
Hardware fault, or system
program error
Set the calendar clock again from the System
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program
in the System Installer mode, then re-install the
program. (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System
Program, page 151)
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE
MODE and set Calendar Data.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Tool Transmit Error]
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable. (Appendix F Making the Cable for
Connecting a PC, page 269)
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while
downloading by the following
case:
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
S
f
a
u
l
t
y
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
34.
S
c
o
r
r
u
p
t
e
d
d
a
t
a
b
y
n
o
i
s
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
34.
Check Sum Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S
c
o
r
r
u
p
t
e
d
d
a
t
a
b
y
n
o
i
s
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
Time-out Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
S
f
a
u
l
t
y
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g
c
a
b
l
e
.
[Tool Transmit Error]
The receive buffer has
overflowed.
Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.
Reception was failed by Buffer
Over Flow Error.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of
the NT31/NT31C, and the remedies for these errors.
Message
Cause
Remedy
System Program not exist or
incorrect.
- The system program has not
been installed.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
151).
- The system program has been
deleted due to a hardware
fault, or because the flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to erase System
Program.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
selection of Download System Program and
attempting to delete the system program several
times, contact your OMRON service center
(6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program,
page 151).
Unable to download System
Program.
- A communication error
occurred during downloading
of the system program.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program again (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
151).
- Illegal data has been written
into the screen data memory.
Also refer to 7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen
Data Initialization and Transmission (page 238),
and take the corrective action described for tool
transmission errors.
- Hardware fault, or flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to write System Settings. Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
If the same message is displayed on repeating
writing of system settings several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
program) has reached its life.
If writing is normally terminated after the error
message was once displayed, the Memory
Switch setting for system program may have
been altered. In such a case, check and re-set
the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the
Maintenance mode.
Unable to erase Screen Data.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
screen data deletion several times, contact your
OMRON service center.
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur dur-
ing operation, and their remedies.
Operation When a
Communication Error
Occurs
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT31/NT31C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for Buzzer
Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF. An error message is displayed
provided the setting for the Comm. Auto-Return memory switch is not ON (note
that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON).
Operation When
Communication Errors
Occur
When an error message is displayed, press the OK touch switch displayed on
the screen. The NT31/NT31C will return to the screen that was displayed before
the error occurred, and operation will restart.
Display of
Communication Errors
For communication errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred, the
error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the probable
cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
Example:
Parity error at serial port A
Receive Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Parity error
• Framing error
• Overrun error
• FCS (sum value) error
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
• PC unit No. error (host link only)
• NAK received (in the case of the host link, the end code is also displayed)
• Undefined command error
Send Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
Probable Causes and
Remedies
The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the
table below.
Error Details
Displayed Probable Cause
Remedy
Parity Error
Communication parameters/
conditions set incorrectly.
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame
length, communications speed, stop bit length and
flow control agree with those at the NT31/NT31C.
Framing Error
Over-run Error
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly.
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
communication. conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
FCS (Check Sum) Error
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
communication.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
The PC is transmitting incorrect
data.
Check the operation at the host side.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Section 7-3
Error Details
Time-out Error
Displayed Probable Cause
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly. (Send/Receive) perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
Remedy
Check the communication cable connection and
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
The communication service of the
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)
Check that the host is capable of communicating
with the NT31/NT31C (confirm that the
communication settings of the host and
NT31/NT31C match).
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send) Set a longer value for Time-out Interval at the host
side.
Time-out Interval is too short.
(Receive)
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval in the
System Menu. (6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval,
page 185) It may also be possible to solve the
problem by shortening the host cycle time.
PC Unit No. Error
NAK received
The unit # does not match that set
on the PC.
Re-set the unit number at the host side to 0.
Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
communication.
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
——
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the
power supply line.
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot
of noise, use a cable with a high degree of
protection against noise for the transmission route.
Also make the cable as short as possible.
Undefined Command
Error
The host is not supported.
Check the PC model used for the host.
Instruction level 3 is not effective.
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is
level 1, 2, 3.
Data Over Flow Error
Communication command from the
host is too long. (With memory link)
Set flow control method in the host.
Increase transmission interval.
Command transmission to the host
is not possible.
Check the communication cable.
Check the control method at the PT and the host.
Increase the communication on speed when it to
slow.
7-3 Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT31/NT31C is always
used in its optimum condition.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any inter-
nal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
Spare PT
Backlight
It is advisable to have a spare NT31/NT31C available to minimize system down-
time in the event of an NT31/NT31C failure or if the screen display becomes diffi-
cult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read
easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the
NT31/NT31C while it is mounted in an operation panel.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Section 7-3
Replaceable Backlight Model
NT31C-CFL01 (for both NT31 and NT31C)
Guide to Backlight Replacement
Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to be re-
placed after about 25,000 hours when used at medium brightness (the figure is
about 10,000 hours when used at the high brightness setting). However, the life
of the backlight does vary, particularly in accordance with the temperature in the
environment in which it is used, and it should be replaced when it is getting dim
and the screen is getting hard to read.
Notes on Replacing the
Backlight
Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.
• Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust
or foreign bodies will enter the unit, and where no water will drip onto it.
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT31/NT31C with your bare
hands.
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work.
• Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the cable. Do
not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.
• Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.
Replacing the Backlight
Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT31/NT31C power before replacing the back-
light. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF the
power supply.
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high tempera-
tures.
Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn the power supply to the NT31/NT31C OFF.
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the
printer cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit
also.
3. Open the cover of the CFL unit housing by following the procedure de-
scribed below.
a) Unscrew the screw in the center of the cover.
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come
out for some reason and falls inside the NT31/NT31C, it must be extri-
cated without fail.
b) Open the cover while pressing the tabs at its left and right inward.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Section 7-3
c) When the cover has opened far enough, remove it.
b
b
b
4. Remove the CFL unit by following the procedure described below.
a) Disengage the connector.
b) Sufficiently loosen the screw that secures the CFL unit.
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come
out for some reason and falls inside the NT31/NT31C, it must be extri-
cated without fail.
c) Shift the CFL unit to the right.
d) Pull out the CFL unit.
5. Fit a new CFL unit by following the procedure described below.
a) Slot the projection on the left end of the CFL unit into the hole in the fixture
inside the PT.
b) Engage the CFL unit with the fixture inside the PT.
Check that the CFL unit is in contact with the left end of the fixture and is
parallel with the fixture during this engagement.
c) Tighten the screw of the CFL unit to secure it.
The tightening torque is 0.2 N@m.
d) Engage the connector of the CFL unit with the connector of the
NT31/NT31C so that the red cable is at the left side.
Insert the connector so that it clicks firmly into place.
Red cable
White cable
d
b
Backlight unit
Fixture inside the NT31/NT31C
6. Fit the cover and secure it with the screw.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Section 7-3
7. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws.
8. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communication test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
9. On confirming that all the tests in 8 can be executed normally, start opera-
tion.
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery
The NT31/NT31C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT31/NT31C is used in a location where
the ambient temperature is 25_C. If the temperature at the location of use is
higher than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at suitable
intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT31/NT31C.
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced im-
mediately when replacement becomes necessary.
Battery Type
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT31 and NT31C)
Guide to Replacement
Replace the battery in the following cases. The battery must be replaced within 5
days.
• When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.
• When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when stopped).
• When the message The voltage is lowered. is displayed on switching on the
power or resetting the NT31/NT31C.
• When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery
check menu of the Maintenance mode.
Battery Replacement Method
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5 min-
utes.
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.
Reference: Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents cannot
be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.
2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left
of the rear face of the NT31/NT31C and pull it toward you.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspection and Cleaning
Section 7-4
3. Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable,
and pull the connector straight out.
4. Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the
NT31/NT31C and fit the battery under the battery cover.
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it
faces to the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after
disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be re-
placed while the NT31/NT31C power is on, and in this case there is no time
restriction.
5. Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.
7-4 Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT31/NT31C regularly to ensure that it is always used in
its optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to
time as follows.
• In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particular-
ly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the
front sheet of the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.
• If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted neu-
tral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
• If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long peri-
ods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove them
during cleaning.
Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.
Inspection Method
In normal environments, inspect the NT31/NT31C at intervals of between 6
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
Items Required for The Inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
• Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)
• Tester (or digital voltmeter)
• Industrial alcohol
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspection and Cleaning
Section 7-4
• 100% cotton cloth
• Hygrometer (required in some cases)
• Thermometer (required in some cases)
• Synchroscope (required in some cases)
• Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
Points Inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that the
values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT31/NT31C, for example by
re-tightening screws.
Point
Inspection
Inspection Details
Fluctuation in power supply terminal
Criterion
Inspected
Instrument
Power supply
voltage
Permissible voltage fluctuation range Tester
voltage
(24 VDC −15% to +10%)
Ambient
environmental
conditions
Ambient temperature (temperature in the 0 to 50_ C
Thermometer
Hygrometer
operation panel)
Ambient humidity (humidity in the
operation panel)
35% to 85% RH
Presence/absence of dust
Dust must not be settled
To be no looseness
Visual inspection
Philips screwdriver
Philips screwdriver
Mounting
conditions
Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.
Connector connections of connecting
cable
To be fully inserted and locked, with
no looseness
Looseness of screws in external wiring
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection Visual inspection
Components
with limited
lives
Brightness of the backlight
Must be sufficiently bright.
Visual inspection
Backlight life:
Brightness is halved after about
25,000 hours in use at medium
brightness, or about 10,000 hours in
use at high brightness.
Note 1. Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.
2. The disposal of the unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight)
may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accor-
dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local author-
ity.
Reference: Desire on replacing the NT31/NT31C
When replacing the NT31/NT31C after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
S
B
e
s
u
r
e
t
o
s
w
i
t
c
h
t
h
e
p
o
w
e
r
O
F
F
b
e
f
o
r
e
s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
.
S After replacement, check that the new NT31/NT31C is not subject to the same
error.
S If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault
as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON ad-
dress indicated on the back cover of this book.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Rated power supply voltage
Allowable power supply voltage range
Allowable power interruption time
Power consumption
24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)
No regulation
15 W max.
Operating ambient temperature
Storage ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Operating environment
0 to +50_ C
–20 to +60_ C
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between power supply terminals and panel)
Noise resistance
Normal mode:
300 Vp-p
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise time of 1 ns
- 10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude
2
Vibration resistance (operating)
Shock resistance (operating)
- 57 to 150 Hz with 1G {9.8 m/s } acceleration
for 60 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions
2
147 m/s {15G}
3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
195 (W) 142 (H) 54 (D) mm
Dimensions
Weight
(With expansion unit mounted: 195 (W) 142 (H) 74 (D) mm)
1 kg max.
184 +0.5 × 131+0.5 mm
0
0
Panel cutout dimensions
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4)*
D-type grounding (Ground to 100 Ω or less)
Enclosure ratings
Grounding
* The NT31/NT31C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
Specification
NT31:
Monochrome STN LCD (with backlight)
NT31C: Color STN LCD (with backlight)
320 dots horizontally 240 dots vertically
Display device
Number of dots (resolution)
Size of a standard character
Effective display area
NT 31-ST121j -EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm
NT 31C-ST141j -EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm
118.2 mm horizontally 89.4 mm vertically (5.7 inches)
NT31:
Up:
20
_
_
Down:
30
Left/right: "30
_
Display panel
View angle
NT31C: Up:
Down:
45
_
_
60
Left/right: "50
_
NT31:
Black, white (2 colors)
Display color
NT31C: 8 colors (and intermediate colors can be displayed with
tiling patterns)
Life expectancy
(until brightness reduced by half)
50,000 hours minimum
Contrast adjustment
Adjustable in 100 levels by operation at the touch panel
At low or medium brightness : 25,000 hours minimum
At high brightness : 10,000 hours minimum
Can be replaced from the rear
Life expectancy
Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)
Replacement
Brightness adjustment
Automatic turn-off function
POWER (green LED)
Adjustable in 3 levels by touch switch operation at the touch panel
Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on
Lit while power is being supplied
Lit in green : Running normally, Memory unit automatic transmission
done
Flash in green : Memory unit automatic transmission being
executed, memory unit automatic transmission error
Indicators
RUN
Lit in orange : Low battery voltage (during operation)
Flash in red : Low battery voltage (when NT31/NT31C is stopped)
*1: Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Resistive type
192 (16 horizontally 12 vertically)
Type :
Number of switches:
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen: 192
Cell size:
Input:
NT31/NT31C 6.3 6.3 mm
Touch panel
Pressure-sensitive type
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
External Interface Specifications
Item
Specification
Conforms to EIA RS-232C
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
Serial port A
Serial port B
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6
Serial communication
EIA RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (selectable, by memory switch setting)
D-SUB 25-pin connector (female)
Parallel interface
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector
Expansion interface
Dedicated connector
Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the +5 V
output of pin No. 6. The +5 V output of the unit delivers +5 V " 5% and 250 mA maximum.
Programming Environment
Item
Specification
Programming System Programming support software
Programming Tool
Programming support software: NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.0), by OMRON
Special Features
Item
Specifications
Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)
ON:
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a
buzzer setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
Setting:
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with
no buzzer setting.
Buzzer
Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set
“ERROR ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.
Touch switches
Touch switch input sound
Maintenance function
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.
- Memory switch setting
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface
- Setting condition confirmation function
- Communication check function
- Initialization of internal memory data
- Display of display/alarm history data
- Registered data test display function
- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT31/NT31C
- Backup of display/alarm history data
- Backup of calendar and clock setting
Battery backup
Battery life:
When voltage becomes low: RUN LED lights in orange or red
The communication flag to the PC (BAT LOW) comes
5 years (at 25_ C)
ON (1).
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT31/NT31C is reset, and when
the operation mode is changed.
Resume function
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
Item
Specifications
Functions: - Prints a hard copy of the screen display
- Prints display/alarm histories
Setting:
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print
Method”) in the memory switch menu.
“ESC/P”, “Color”:
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL
Screen print function
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”: Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PC-PR201PL
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PCL 5
However, the NT31 supports monochrome printing only.
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock
Calendar and clock function
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu
Executes functions equivalent to those of al C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1 (-EV1 only), CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and SRM1 (C02-V2 only) PCs.
Programming Console function
Device Monitor function
Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS1 series PLC.
The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PC’s operating mode,
read/change words in the PC’s data areas, and display the PC’s error log.
Compatible PCs include the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1, and CS1-series PCs.
Mathematical function
Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data. The
calculation function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host
words, executes the registered calculations, and writes the results.
Arithmetic operators, logic operators, bit operators, and comparative operators can
be used.
Downloads the system program from the system installer
Downloads/Upload the system program with a memory unit.
System program
transmission
- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the
Support Tool
Transmission
functions
Screen data
transmission
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit.
History data
uploading
Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
Communications Specifications
For a Host Link , RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 9600, 19200 bps
Communications settings
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
7 bits
2 bits
Even
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
1:1
Connector
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Communications protocol
C-series SYSMAC WAY (1:N)
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
For a Host Link , RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 9600, 19200 bps
Communications settings
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
7 bits
2 bits
Even
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
Communications protocol
1:1
Max. 500 m
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
1:1
Connector
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
*
Max. 15 m
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Connector
EIA RS-422A
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1:1
Max. 500 m
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
1:1 to 8
Connector
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
*
Max. 15 m
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Connector
EIA RS-422A/485
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1:1 to 8
Max. 500 m
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
1:1 to 8
Connector
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
*
Max. 15 m
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Connector
EIA RS-422A/485
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1:1 to 8
Max. 500 m
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Appendix A
For a Memory Link , RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Communications settings
Connector
EIA RS-232C
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
Data length:
Stop bit:
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
Parity:
None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
Flow control:
Response:
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
1:1
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Memory link
Communications protocol
* When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:
• RS-232C: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A: Max. total length 500 m
For a Memory Link , RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
Data length:
Stop bit:
7, 8 bits
Communications settings
1, 2 bits
Parity:
None, even, odd
None, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
Communications protocol
1:1
Max. 500 m*
Memory link
For a Bar Code Reader
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 4,800, 9600, 19200 bps
Data length:
Stop bit:
7, 8 bits
Communications settings
1, 2 bits
Parity:
None, even, odd
RS/CS
Flow control:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
Communications protocol
1:1
Max. 15 m
Non-protocol mode
[STX]
Data (0 to 40 bytes)
[ETX]
Data format
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Dimensions
Body
183.5 (7.22)
POWER
RUN
142 (5.59)
130.5 (5.14)
5 (0.20)
54 (2.13)
195 (7.68)
With memory unit installed
(NT-MF261)
Units: mm (inch)
74 (2.91)
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
Appendix B
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting panel
Mounting fixture
POWER
RUN
25 (0.98)
153 (6.02)
15.5 (0.61)
5 (0.2)
145 (5.71)
34 (1.34) (min.)
38 (1.5) (max.)
Units: mm (inch)
206 (8.11)
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
Appendix B
Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)
96 (3.78)
10.2 (0.47)
91 (3.58)
24V
DC
26.7 (1.05)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
5 (0.20)
50 (1.97)
60 (2.36)
Units: mm (inch)
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001-E.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
omRon NT–AL001-E
74.5 (2.93)
4 (0.16)
100.2 (3.94)
(30)
105 (4.13) max.
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
30 (W) 114 (H) 100.2 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
30 (W) 114 (H) 119.5 (D) mm:
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001-E) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the
unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Appendix C
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the
convertor unit with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
2-M4
21
(0.83)
Units: mm (inch)
Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thick-
ness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Appendix C
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
30 (W) 114 (H) 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) 114 (H) 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
200 g max.
Weight
Operating ambient temperature
Operating ambient humidity
Rated power supply voltage
Rated power supply current
Rush current
0 to 55_ C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
+5 V " 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
150 mA max.
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively
and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger
Dielectric strength
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
No corrosive gases
Operating environment
Storage ambient temperature
Vibration resistance
−20 to +75_ C
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
2
Shock resistance
Conforms to JIS C0912 47m/s , 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector
Max. 115.2k bps
Max. 2 m
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector
Specification
Max. 115.2k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
Max. 500 m
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Appendix C
DIP Switch Settings
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.
(Factory settings)
ON
NT–AL001-E
R
om on
1 2 3 4 5 6
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3
OFF
ON
SW1-3
OFF
ON
SW1-4
2-wire type (RS-485)
4-wire type (RS-422A)
SW1-4
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
Continual sending
SW1-5
SW1-6
SW1-6
OFF
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS high)
ON
SW1-5
OFF
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS low)
ON
When using the host link or 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending (set both SW1-5 and 6
OFF).
When using the 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed), set the RS-422A send mode to complies with CS control of
RS-232C (i.e., one of SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Note 1. Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
2. The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
3. Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device such as a PT
(i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP
switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the
convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
4. When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H, CS1G/H model of OMRON
PC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
ON
5
6
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Appendix C
Pin Arrangement
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Terminal
block pin
No.
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-422
device)
Signal name
Abbreviation
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Request to send (−)
CSA
CSB
→
→
←
←
→
→
–
Request to send (+)
Receive data (−)
Receive data (+)
Send data (−)
RDA
RDB
SDA
Send data (+)
SDB
Signal ground
SG (GND)
Functional ground
–
* The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
RS-232C Connector
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-232C
device)
Connector
Signal name
pin No.
Abbreviation
1
1
2
3
4
Not used
–
–
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
Send data
Receive data
SD
RD
RS
←
→
←
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
5
6
7
8
9
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
+5 V
DR
→
→
→
←
–
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor
unit
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
ER
Signal ground
SG
* The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Appendix C
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE
RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block
POWER
LED
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
Convertor
DC-DC
R
1
Fuse
6
IS_5 V
IS_0 V
FG
+5 V
L
L
REG
9
2
SG
SG
Photocoupler
R
R
R
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
3
4
SDB
SDA
2-wire type/
3
SW1-6
SW1-5
4-wire type
SW1-4
RD
SW1-3
R
2
SD
5
6
RDB
RDA
4
RS
R
SW1-2
Terminator
5
CS
RS-422A Dr
7
DR
7
8
CSB
CSA
8
ER
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C
• When transporting the NT31/NT31C, use the packaging intended for it.
• When storing the NT31/NT31C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature: –20 to +60_C
Storage ambient humidity:
35% to 85%
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Fold back the shielding wire.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
Aluminum foil tape
Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making the Cable
Appendix E
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
1, 2, 3...
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., ȏ = 10 mm)
4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End not connected to FG
End connected to FG
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PC
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.
25-pin Connector
2
3
4
5
7
1
2
3
4
5
9
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
Personal computer
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
Remarks
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901
XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
Connector hood
Cable
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
9-pin Connector
2
2
RD
SD
3
3
SD
RS
CS
SG
RD
7
4
RS
Personal computer
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
8
5
CS
5
9
SG
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
Remarks
XM2D-0901
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0913
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT
Connector hood*
Cable
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
* One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar
Code Reader
Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader.
Wiring Method
NT31/NT31C side
Bar code reader side
Abbr.
Abbr.
Pin No.
SD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RD
RS
SD
RD
CS
RS
RS-232C
interface
CS
ER
SG
+5 V
+5 V
SG
When using the +5 V output of the NT31/NT31C, limit the cable length to within 2 m. If a cable longer than 2 m is
used, connect an external power supply to the bar code reader.
Connector and Related Parts
Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the
connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
Remarks
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911
9-pin type, made by OMRON, PT side
9-pin, made by OMRON
Connector hood
Cable
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer
The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer.
NT-CNT121 (made by OMRON, cable length 1.5 m, 20-pin – 36-pin)
Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer.
• Connector pin arrangement and wiring
Connector for a printer
on PT side
Printer
side
Pin No.
Pin No.
Abbr.
1
8
3
6
Shielding wire
1
11
Connector hood
Connector hood
0V
D7
20
9
1
11
2
N.C.
D6
N.C.
8
12
3
D5
7
0V
21
6
13
4
D4
N.C
D3
N.C.
5
14
5
2
0
1
0
0V
22
23
4
15
6
1
0V
1
9
D2
16
7
N.C.
D1
N.C.
3
17
8
D0
2
0V
18
9
24
1
STROB
N.C.
BUSY
0V
19
10
20
N.C.
11
19
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I
Relationship between System Program and
Hardware
Here, relationship between system program and hardware is described.
NT31/NT31C have following models.
NT31-ST121j -E
Conventional product
NT31C-ST141j -E
NT31-ST121j -EV1
NT31C-ST141j -EV1
NT31-ST121j -EV2
NT31C-ST141j -EV2
Version upgrade model of the products above
(12/98)
Version upgrade model of the products above
(12/99)
System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state. Also, system pro-
grams are supplied with the Support Tool as follows.
• System programs for NT31-ST121j-E/NT31C-ST141j-E: System Program Ver. 1.0
j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV2/ZJCAT1-EV2)
• System programs for NT31-ST121j-EV1/NT31C-ST141j-EV1: System Program Ver. 2.0j or 2.1
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV3/ZJCAT1-EV3)
j
• System programs for NT31-ST121j-EV2/NT31C-ST141j-EV2: System Program Ver. 3.0
j
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJCAT1-EV4)
(A system program for the earlier NT30/620 PTs is also included with the NT-ZJCAT1-EV4.)
These system programs have mutual compatibility, therefore, they can be installed and used for NT31-ST121j -E/
NT31C-ST141j -E/NT31-ST121j-EV1/NT31C-ST141j-EV1/NT31-ST121j-EV2/NT31C-ST141j-EV2
each.
However, there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination. Refer to the following table.
Limitations of System Program/PT Combinations
The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program.
For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool, refer to NT-series Support Tool
for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual (V061-E1-j).
Combining a -V1 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix
Hardware
NT31-ST121j-E
NT31-ST121j-EV1
NT31C-ST141j-E
NT31C-ST141j-EV1
System program Ver. 1.0
j
The following functions cannot be used
The following functions cannot be used
S Analogue meter
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Analogue meter
High-definition font display
Installation of system programs using memory unit
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Memory link
S High-definition font display
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Memory link
S Window control from the host
S Multiple display of window screens
S Moving a window
Window control from the host
Multiple display of window screens
Moving a window
S
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
*
Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1
j
The following functions cannot be used
The new functions supported by the -V2 versions
cannot be used. Refer to the following table for details.
S
S
S
Installation of system programs using memory unit
High-definition font display
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relationship between System Program and Hardware
Appendix I
Combining a -V1 Version and -V2 Version
Hardware
NT31-ST121j-EV1
NT31-ST121j-EV2
NT31C-ST141j-EV2
NT31C-ST141j-EV1
System program Ver. 2.0j or Ver. 2.1
j
The following functions (new functions supported by the -V2) cannot be used:
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
Interlock function that controls touch switches, numeral inputs, and character string inputs
Mathematical function
Device Monitor function
NT30/620 compatible mode
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character) displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF switching
displays, numeral memory table displays, and character string memory table displays
System program Ver. 3.0
j
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
Combining a -V2 Version and Version without a -Vj Suffix
Hardware
NT31-ST121j-E
NT31-ST121j-EV2
NT31C-ST141j-E
NT31C-ST141j-EV2
System program Ver. 1.0
j
The following functions cannot be used
The following functions cannot be used
S Analogue meter
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Analogue meter
High-definition font display
S High-definition font display
S Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
S Memory link
Installation of system programs using memory unit
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Memory link
S Window control from the host
S Multiple display of window screens
S Moving a window
Window control from the host
Multiple display of window screens
Moving a window
S
S
S
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
Additional data areas accessible in CS1-series PCs
The CS1-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
S
S
S
S
Mathematical function
S
S
S
S
Mathematical function
Device Monitor function
NT30/620 compatible mode
Device Monitor function
NT30/620 compatible mode
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
*
Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
System program Ver. 3.0
j
The following functions cannot be used
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and
Reference Manual can be used.
S
S
Installation of system programs using memory unit
High-definition font display
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix J
Model List
PTs
Model
Specification
NT31-ST121-EV2
NT31-ST121B-EV2
NT31C-ST141-EV2
NT31C-ST141B-EV2
STN monochrome display, ivory
STN monochrome display, black
STN color display, ivory
STN color display, black
Host Link Units
Model
Specification
Applicable PC
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
C-series
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
CPU-mounted type with RS-232C connector
CPU-mounted type with RS-422A connector
Rack-mounting unit with RS-232C connector for C200H
Rack-mounting unit with RS-422A connector for C200H
Features a selectable RS-232C/RS-422A connector
Rack-mounting unit for C500
C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
CV500-LK201
Features an RS-232C connector and a selectable
RS-232C/RS-422A connector
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
Rack-mounting unit for CVM1/CV
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
Model
Specification
Model Name
SRM1-C02-V2
Features an RS-232C port
SRM1
Communications Unit
Model
Specification
Applicable PC
CS1W-SCU21
RS-232C (2 ports)
Rack-mounting unit
CS1-series
CS1G/H
CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CDj -
CPM1A-20CDj -
CPM1A-30CDj -
CPM1A-40CDj -
j
j
j
j
j
j
RS-232C adapter/RS-422A adapter connected to the
peripheral port
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CD
CPM2A-40CD
CPM2A-60CD
j j -
j j -
j j -
j
j
j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model List
Appendix J
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -
j -
j
j
The PC’s communications connector can be split into
an RS-232C port and peripheral port with a
CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable. (The
C-series
CPM2C
CPM2C-20
j
CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cables convert the
connector to a single RS-232C or peripheral port.)
CQM1-CPU21-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
(The CQM1H-CPU11-E has only a peripheral port.)
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
(*)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
(*)
(*)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
(*)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
(*)
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS1-series
CS1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:1 NT Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CDj -
CPM1A-20CDj -
CPM1A-30CDj -
CPM1A-40CDj -
j
j
j
j
j
j
RS-232C adapter connected to the peripheral port
(RS-422A adapter cannot be used)
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CD
CPM2A-40CD
CPM2A-60CD
j j -
j j -
j j -
j
j
j
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model List
Appendix J
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM2C-10
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j -
j -
j
j
Connect to the RS-232C port of a CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable.
C-series
CPM2C
C-series
CQM1
CPM2C-20
j
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
(*)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
(*)
(*)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
(*)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
(*)
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:N NT Link
Model
Specification
PC Type
(*1)
(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
(*)
(*)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
(*)
(*)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
(*)
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model List
Appendix J
Model
Specification
PC Type
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1H
*1: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*2: Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a High-speed NT Link (1:N))
Model
Specification
PC Type
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CS1-series
CS1H
Reference: Serial Communications Boards (CS1W-SCB41) and Serial Communications Units (CS1W-SCU21)
with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used to establish a high-speed 1:N NT Link.
RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Model
Specification
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
NT-AL001
RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor
Model
Specification
CPM1-CIF01
CPM1-CIF11
Links the RS-232C port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link, and NT Link (1:1))
Links the RS-422A port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link)
Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Model
Remark
Support Tool*
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows 95/98/NT (English version)
CD-ROM
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
Options
NT31C-CFL01
NT30-KBA04
NT30-KBA01
NT-MF261
Replaceable backlight (common to NT31 and NT31C)
Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT31/NT31C
Chemical-resistant cover for NT31/NT31C
Memory unit for NT31/NT31C
3G2A9-BAT08
Spare battery
* The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs (Ver. 3.0) for the
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. System programs for the earlier NT30/620 PTs are also included.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model List
Appendix J
Cables with Connectors for PT ↔ PC/NT-AL001-E
Model
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T
XW2Z-200P
XW2Z-500P
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
SJ45007-102
Cable Length
Applicable units
Communication Method
Specification
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
2 m
5 m
1 m
Host link units with a 25-pin
connector
Serial port A host link
(RS-232C only)
9-pin ↔ 25-pin
Host link units with a 9-pin
connector
Serial port A host link, NT Link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)
9-pin ↔ 9-pin
25-pin ↔ 25-pin
25-pin ↔ 9-pin
Host link units with a 25-pin
connector
Serial port B host link
(RS-232C only)
Host link units with a 9-pin
connector
Serial port B host link, NT Link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)
CPU Units with a 9-pin
Host Link or 1:1 NT Link using
NT-AL001-E
connector (A +5 V power
supply wire is attached for
NT-AL001-E connections.)
9-pin ↔ 9-pin
9-pin ↔ 9-pin
9-pin ↔ 9-pin
SJ45007-202
XW2Z-070T-1
XW2Z-200T-1
SJ46006-102
SJ46006-202
2 m
0.7 m
2 m
CPU Units with a 9-pin
Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N
(*1)
connector (The PC
+5 V for NT-AL001-E
connections.)
supplies NT Link using NT-AL001-E
1 m
CPU Units with a 9-pin
Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N
(*1)
connector (The PC
supplies NT Link using NT-AL001-E
+5 V for NT-AL001-E
connections.)
2 m
*1: The following PCs can supply +5 V: C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, CPM2A, CPM2C, and CS1G/H.
Cables with Connectors
Model
CV500-CN228
Cable Length
2 m
Specification
25-pin (male) ↔ 9-pin (male)
25-pin (female) ↔ 14-pin (male)
9-pin (female) ↔ 9-pin (male)
*
XW2Z-S001
XW2Z-S002
15 cm
2 m
* The XW2Z-S001 is a converting cable. A CV500-CN228 must be purchased separately for connection to a computer.
Connection Cable
Model
Specification
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
Applicable Connectors
Name
Model
Specification
25-pin type (male), made by OMRON
Connector
XM2A-2501
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901
XM2D-0901
DB-25P
25-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
9-pin type (male), made by OMRON
9-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
25-pin type (male), made by JAE
Connector hood
XM2S-2511
XM2S-2513
XM2S-0911
25-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
25-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E 9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
DB-C2-J9
9-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
25-pin type, made by JAE
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model List
Appendix J
Printer Cable
Model
Specification
NT-CNT121
Printer cable for half pitch (1.5 m), made by OMRON
Cable for Peripheral Port of CS1-series PC
Model
CS1W-CN118
Specification
Made by OMRON (CS1-series peripheral port ↔ D-Sub, 9-pin, female)
Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector
Model
CPM2C-CN111
Specification
Made by OMRON (CPM2C communications port ↔ D-Sub, 9-pin, female, C-series
peripheral port)
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix K
Option List
Replaceable Backlight ... NT31C-CFL01 (Used for Both NT31/NT31C)
This is a backlight (CFL unit) for replacement purposes.
Protective Sheet ... NT30-KBA04 (Used for Both NT31/NT31C)
Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.
The five sheets make a set.
Chemical-resistant Cover ... NT30-KBA01
Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of
silicone rubber.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option List
Appendix K
The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents.
Protects against
Does not protect against
Hexane
Boric acid
Sulfuric acid
Nitrogen
Lubricating oil
Benzene
Ammonia gas
Carbonic acid gas
Phenol
Butane
Carbonic acid
Chlorinated solvents
Napthalene
Soy bean oil
Toluene
Glycerin
Ammonia water
Calcium chloride
Developing fluid (hypo)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above, please inquire whether or not protection is offered
(if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection, please use this
product even if the agent is not listed in the “Protects against” column of the table above).
Replacement Battery ... 3G2A9-BAT08
This is a lithium battery used for memory backup.
Memory Unit ... NT-MF261
This is a dedicated unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT31/NT31C. Data is
transmitted by DIP switch setting at the memory unit.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Chemical-resistant cover, 283
Numbers
1:N connection among RS-422A ports, 122
Cleaning method, 245
Clearing screen data, 140, 154
1:N connection among RS-485 ports, 125
Clearing/installing the system program, 151
Comm. A Method, 158
1:N connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT31/NT31C and
RS-232C at the host, 92
Comm. B Method, 158
Comm. B Select, 158
Communication board, 55, 68, 72, 75, 102
Communication boards, 111
A
Allowable power supply voltage range, 247
Communication by Using Memory Link, 20
Communication condition, 157
Communication condition settings for bar code readers, 188
Applicable connectors, 281
Automatic transmission (memory unit), 42, 49
Communication condition settings for the host link method,
158
B
Communication errors and their remedies, 239
Communication method for communications with the host, 157
Communication method settings, 158
Communication methods, 26
Backlight, 241
Backlight brightness adjustment, 193
Backlight unit, 30
Battery cover, 30
Communication port, 26
Before operating, 22
Brightness adjustment, 248
Communication type, 26
Communication Unit, 277
Communications specifications, 251
Comparison between NT31 and NT31C, 5
Connecting a bar code reader, 37
Connecting a printer, 36
C
Cable connection dimensions, 257
Cable for peripheral port of CS1-series PLC, 282
Cables with connectors, 281
Connecting directly between RS-232C ports, 79
Connecting to other model PCs, 20
Connecting to the Support Tool, 35
Connection cable, 281
Calling the System Installer mode, 138
Calling the System Menu, 138
Connection method, 26
Cell size (Touch panel), 248
Contrast adjustment, 191
Changing the system settings, 153
Checking communication at serial ports, 217
Checking communication with a printer, 220
Checking communication with the support tool, 216
Checking interfaces, 215
CPU, 102
CPUs, 68, 72, 75, 111, 113
CPUs (for connection via a host link), 277
CPUs connectable with host link units or expansion commu-
nication board, 102
Checking screen data, 202
Checking the backlight, 209
D
Checking the battery voltage, 214
Checking the buzzer, 205
Device check, 205
Checking the LCD (screen display), 208
Checking the PT setting status, 197
Checking the RUN LED, 206
Device Monitor function, 227
Dimensions, 247
Direct connection function, 17
Disabling/enabling System Menu display, 153
Checking touch switches, 212
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory, 153
Display, 29
Installation environment, 32
Installation in the operation panel, 32
Display color, 248
Display device, 248
L–M
Display specifications, 248
Life expectancy (backlight), 248
Life expectancy (display panel), 248
Life expectancy (touch panel), 248
Maintenance Mode, 136
Displaying and printing the display history record, 198
Displaying/setting the calendar and clock, 195
Downloading the system program, 152
Making the cable, 267
E
Making the cable for connecting a PC, 269
Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader, 271
Making the cable for connection to a printer, 273
Manual transmission (memory unit), 44, 50
Manuals, 22
Effective display area, 248
Enclosure ratings, 247
Error messages, 235
Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies, 239
Errors occurring at start of operation, 235
Errors occurring during operation, 237
Memory initialization, 140
Memory link method, 78, 116
Memory switch, 157
Errors occurring on screen data initialization and transmission,
238
Memory switch setting screen, 168
Memory unit, 284
Errors when using a memory unit, 45, 51
Expansion interface connector, 30
Expansion Mode, 136
Menu tree, 137
RUN mode, 135
External interface specifications, 249
System Installer Mode, 135
Mounting dimensions, 256
F–H
Functional ground terminal, 34
General specifications, 247
GR terminal, 30
N
Noise resistance, 247
NT link, 18
Grounding, 34, 247
NT link (1:1) method, 67
Host link, 18
NT link (1:N) method, 72, 113
high-speed, 75, 115
Host link method, 54, 101
Host link unit, 55, 277
NT-AL001, 259
Number of dots, 248
Number of switches (touch panel), 248
I
I/O settings, 191
O
In the panel, 4
Initializing alarm history record data, 144
Initializing display history record data, 142
Initializing the memory switches, 149
Initializing the memory tables, 147
Initializing the recipe tables, 145
Inspection method, 245
Operating ambient humidity, 247
Operating ambient temperature, 247
Operating environment, 247
Operating force, 248
Operation at startup, 134
Operation modes, 135
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Serial port B, 17, 26
P
Serial port B connector, 30
Peripheral devices that can be connected, 16
Power consumption, 247
Power input terminals, 30
POWER LED, 29
Set, 161
Setting “Screen Saver Movement”, 175
Setting the automatic reset function, 183
Setting the bar code reader input function, 188
Setting the ”Buzzer Sound”, 171
Setting the communication type for serial port B, 167
Power supply connection, 33
precautions, xi
Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen data, 156
Principal functions of NT31/NT31C, 9
Printer cable, 282
Setting the conditions for communications with the memory
link method, 158
Setting the display language in the System Installer mode, 151
Setting the history display method, 179
Setting the host link method, 160
Setting the “Key Press Sound”, 170
Setting the Memory Link Method, 165
Setting the NT link (1:1) method, 162
Setting the NT link (1:N) method, 163
Setting the “Print Method”, 174
Setting the “Printer Controller”, 172
Setting the resume function, 181
Setting the retry count, 186
Printer connector, 30
Programming console function, 221
Programming environment, 249
Protective sheet, 283
PT, 277
PT Memory, 20
R
Rated power supply voltage, 247
Setting the screen saver start-up time, 177
Setting the ”Start-up Wait Time”, 169
Setting the terminal resistance, 99, 128
Setting the time-out interval, 185
Shock resistance (operating), 247
Special features, 249
Recipe function, 6
Recommended printers, 36
Relationship between system program and hardware, 275
Relationships among modes, 135
Replaceable backlight, 283
Replacement battery, 284
Replacing the backlight, 242
Replacing the battery, 244
Reset switch, 30
Starting operation, 168
Starting the NT31/NT31C, 134
Storage ambient temperature, 247
Supplemental functions to V2, 6
Support Tool, 280
RS-232C adaptor, 280
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, 88, 280
RS-422A adaptor, 280
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode, 139
Switching to the RUN mode, 168
System configuration, 16
RUN, 135
RUN LED, 29
System Menu, 135
S
T–U
Screen data composition and transmission units, 155
Screen data memory check, 209
Selecting menu items, 139
Terminal resistance setting terminal , 99
Transmit Mode, 136
Transmitting the screen data, 155
Serial communication board, 54, 72, 75, 102, 116
Serial communication unit, 54
Transporting and storing the NT31/NT31C, 265
Usable systems (programming console function), 221
Using a Memory Unit(NT31/NT31C with V1), 39
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, 259
Serial port A, 17, 26
Serial port A connector, 30
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
V
W
Warning label, 30
Waterproofed, 4
Weight, 247
Vibration resistance (operating), 247
View angle, 248
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V062-E1-02
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
Revised content
1
July 2000
Original production
02
January 2003
Page 73: Description on connections added under Connecting to CS1-series
CPU Units.
Page 185: Setting range of 0 to 10 seconds corrected to 1 to 10 seconds un-
der Setting the Time-out Interval and “00” deleted from the sequence in the
bottom graphic.
Page 224: Description on error display under Reference changed.
Page 235: One row about the numeral display or numeral input field added to
the table.
Page 269: Indications inside connector graphics corrected and a note about
the use of shielding wire added to each graphic.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OMRON Corporation
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS, INC.
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authorized Distributor:
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. V062-E1-02
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|